R-1742 - 08/14/2018 - CONTRACTS - Resolutions Exhibits?´lη ttι
3(1伐 |18
Three(3)Origin,is Signed by other party
Or:lin口 l provided to staff member for other party
oHgl口 al prOvided to o「たlal FIlё3REV=EW OF CONTRACTS
p鞘 碑 m/Accountr畑
"ber:
rded Contract Price: I Audoeted Amount:*l t, -7Qb.&-- ,
Under$20′000
$20,000・ 率500′00.0
宰500,001‐串1,0001000
over sl,ooo,00o
■trじ `btt」75入 03bハ ヒ■こがた
Ъ 3か υ品
`た
つ紗
Name: /Ea*t #.rOr*rrsr{ ,bs Datel Z/l/fe
D●
":7_5//
Name: /hr*e #, "o/abo.X {rr Date: )/st
Vi∥38e of oak Br。。たI Approved by Boarご of7rustt:s_DOte/11ithお:
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
CONTRACT FOR FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00ⅣIRENOVATION PROJECT
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
CONTRACT FOR FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M
RENOVATION PROЛ CT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ARTICLE I: THE WORK ............1
l.l Performance of the Work ................... I
1.2 Commencement and Completion Dates ...............2
1.3 Required Submittals .........2
A. Submittals Required .........2
B. Number and Format ..........2
C. Time of Submission and Owner's Review ...........2
D. Responsibility for De1ay........ .............3
1.4 Review and Interpretation of Contract Provisions .................3
1.5 Conditions at the Work Site; Record Drawings .....................3
1.6 Technical Ability to Perform ..............4
1.7 Financial Ability to Perform ...............4
1.8 Time......... .......4
1.9 Safety at the Work Site........... ............4
l.l0 Cleanliness of the Work Site and Environs ..........5
l.l I Damage to the Work, the Work Site, and Other Property.... .................... 5
l.l2 Subcontractors and Suppliers .............5
A. Approval and Use of Subcontractors and Suppliers............. ....................5
B. Removal of Subcontractors and Suppliers ...........6
I . 1 3 Simultaneous Work By Others . ... .. . . ... 6
l.l4 Occupancy Prior to Final Payment............. ..........6
1.15 Owner's Right to Terminate or Suspend Work for Convenience..............................6
A. Termination or Suspension for Convenience .............. ...........6
B. Payment for Completed Work.. ..........6
ARTICLE II: CHANGES AND DELAYS. ......................7
-1-
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
CONTRACT FOR FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION
PROECT
ln consideration of the mutual promises set forth below, the Village of Oak Broolg 1200
Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illin6i5, 60523, an Illinois municipal corporation ("Owner"), anda
Corporation ("Contractor"), make this Contract as of
Date") and hereby agree as follows:
2018, (the "Effective
ARTICLE I: THE WORK
1.1 Performance of the Work
Contractor, at its sole cost and expense, must provide, perform, and complete all of the
following, all of which is herein referred to as the "Worll':
l. Labor. Equipment. Materials. and Supplies. Provide, perform, and complete, in the
manner described and specified in this Contract, all necessary work, labor, services,
transportation, equipment, materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas,
electric, water, waste disposal, information, data, and other means and items
necessary to accomplish the Project at the Work Site, both as defined in
Attachment A, in accordance with the specifications attached hereto as
Attachment B, the drawings identified in the list attached hereto as Attachment C,
and the Special Project Requirements attached hereto as Attachment D.
2. Permits. Except as otherwise provided in Attachment A, procure and furnish all
permits, licenses, and other govemmental approvals and authorizations necessary
in connection therewith.
3. Bonds and Insurance. Procure and fumish all Bonds and all certificates of
insurance specified in this Contract.
4. Taxes. Pay all applicable federal, state, and local taxes.
5. Miscellaneous. Do all other things required of Contractor by this Contract,
including without limitation arranging for utility and other services needed for the
Work and for testing, including the installation of ternporary utility lines, wiring,
switches, fixfures, hoses, connections, and meters, and providing sufficient sanitary
conveniences and shelters to accommodate all workers and all personnel of Owner
engaged in the Work.
CONTRACT
refer to all subcontractors and suppliers of Contractor. Every subcontract must include a provision
binding the subcontractor or supplier to all provisions of this Contract.
B. Removal of Subcontractors and Suppliers. If any subcontractor or supplier fails to
perform the part of the Work undertaken by it in a manner satisfactory to Owner, Contractor must
immediately upon notice from Owner terminate such subcontractor or supplier. Contractor will
have no claim for damages, for compensation in excess of the Contract Price, or for a delay or
extension of the Contract Time as a result of any such termination.
1.13 Simultaneous Work Bv Others
Owner has the right to perform or have performed such other work as Owner may desire
in, about, or near the Work Site during the performance of the Work by Contractor. Contractor
must make every reasonable effort to perform the Work in such manner as to enable both the Work
and such other work to be completed without hindrance or interference from each other.
Contractor must afford Owner and other contractors reasonable opportunity for the execution of
such other work and must properly coordinate the Work with such other work.
l.l4 Occupancv Prior to Final Pavment
Owner will have the right, at its election, to occupy, use, or place in service any part of the
Work prior to Final Payment. Such occupancy, use, or placement in service must be conducted in
such manner as not to damage any of the Work or to unreasonably interfere with the progress of
the Work. No such occupancy, use, or placernent in service may be construed as an acceptance of
any of the Work or a release or satisfaction of Contractor's duty to insure and protect the Work,
nor may it, unless conducted in an unreasonable manner, be considered as an interference with
Contractor's provision, performance, or completion of the Work.
1.15 Owner's Right to Terminate or Suspend Work for Convenience
A. Termination or Suspension for Convenience. Owner has the right, for its
convenience, to terminate or suspend the Work in whole or in part at any time by written notice to
Contractor. Every such notice must state the extent and effective date of such termination or
suspension. On such effective date, Contractor must, as and to the extent directed, stop Work
under this Contract, cease all placernent of further orders or subcontracts, terminate or suspend
Work under existing orders and subcontracts, cancel any outstanding orders or subcontracts that
may be cancelled, and take any action necessary to protect any property in its possession in which
Owner has or may acquire any interest and to dispose of such property in such manner as may be
directed by Owner.
B. Payment for Completed Work. tn the event of any termination pursuant to
Subsection I . 1 5A above, Owner must pay Contractor ( 1 ) such direct costs, excluding overhead, as
Contractor has paid or incurred for all Work done in compliance with, and as required by or
pursuant to, this Contract up to the effective date of termination together with ten percent of such
costs for overhead and profit; and (2) such other costs pertaining to the Work, exclusive of
overhead and profit, as Contractor may have reasonably and necessarily incurred as the result of
…6-
CONTRACT
such termination. Any such payment may be offset by any prior payment or payments and is
subject to Owner's rights to withhold and deduct as provided in this Contract.
ARTICLE II: CHANGES AND DELAYS
2.1 Chanses
Owner has the right, by written order executed by Owner, to make changes in the Contract,
the Work, the Work Site, and the Contract Time ("Change Order"). If any Change Order causes
an increase or decrease in the amount of the Work, an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price
or Contract Time may be made. All claims by Contractor for an equitable adjustment in either the
Contract Price or the Contract Time must be made within two business days following receipt of
such Change Order, and may, if not made prior to such time, be conclusively deemed to have been
waived. No decrease in the amount of the Work caused by any Change Order will entitle
Contractor to make any claim for damages, anticipated profits, or other compensation.
2.2 Delays
A. Extensions for Unavoidable Delays. For any delay that may result from causes that
could not be avoided or controlled by Contractor, Contractor must, upon timely written
application, be entitled to issuance of a Change Order providing for an extension of the Contract
Time for a period of time equal to the delay resulting from such unavoidable cause. No extension
of the Contract Time will be allowed for any other delay in completion of the Work.
B. No Compensation for Delays. No payment, compensation, damages, or adjustment
of any kind, other than the extension of the Contract Time provided in Subsection 2.2A above,
may be made to, or claimed by, Contractor because of hindrances or delays from any cause in the
commencement, prosecution, or completion of the Work, whether caused by Owner or any other
party and whether avoidable or unavoidable.
ARTICLE III: CONTRACTOR,S RESPONSIBILITY FOR
DEFECTIVE WORK
3.1 Inspection: Testing: Correction of Defects
A. Inspection. Until Final Payment, all parts of the Work are subject to inspection and
testing by Owner or its designated representatives. Contractor must furnish, at its own expense,
all reasonable access, assistance, and facilities required by Owner for such inspection and testing.
B. Re-Inspection. Re-inspection and re-testing of any Work may be ordered by Owner
at any time, and, if so ordered, any covered or closed Work must be uncovered or opened by
Contractor. If the Work is found to be in full compliance with this Contract, then Ownermust pay
the cost of uncovering, opening, re-inspecting, or re-testing, as the case may be. If such Work is
not in full compliance with this Contract, then Contractor must pay such cost.
‐7¨
CONTRACT
C. Correction. Until Final Payment, Contractor must, promptly and without charge,
repair, correct, or replace all or any part of the Work that is defective, damaged, flawed, or
unsuitable or that in any way fails to conform strictly to the requirements of this Contract.
3.2 Warrantv of Work
A. Scope of Warranty. Contractor warrants that the Work and all of its components
will be free from defects and flaws in design, workmanship, and materials; must strictly conform
to the requirements of this Contract; and will be fit, sufficient, and suitable for the purposes
expressed in, or reasonably inferred from, this Contract. The warranty herein expressed is in
addition to any other warranties expressed in this Contract, or expressed or implied by law, which
are hereby reserved unto Owner.
B. Repairs: Extension of Warranty. Contractor, promptly and without charge, must
correct any failure to fulfill the above warranty that may be discovered or develop at any time
within one year after Final Payment or such longer period as may be prescribed in Attachment B
or Attachment D to this Contract or by law. The above warranty may be extended automatically
to cover all repaired and replacement parts and labor provided or performed under such warranty
and Contractor's obligation to correct Work may be extended for a period of one year from the
date of such repair or replacement. The time period established in this Subsection 3.2B relates
only to the specific obligation of Contractor to correct Work and may not be construed to establish
a period of limitation with respect to other obligations that Contractor has under this Contract.
C. Subcontractor and Supplier Warranties. Whenever Attachment B or Attachment D
requires a subcontractor or supplier to provide a guaranty or warranty, Contractor is solely
responsible for obtaining said guaranty or warranty in form satisfactory to Owner and assigning
said warranty or guaranty to Owner. Acceptance of any assigned warranties or guaranties by
Owner is a precondition to Final Payment and does not relieve Contractor of any of its guaranty
or warranty obligations under this Contract.
3.3 Owner's Risht to Correct
If, within two business days after Owner gives Contractor notice of any defect, damage,
flaw, unsuitability, nonconformity, or failure to meet warranty subject to correction by Contractor
pursuant to Section 3.1 or Section 3.2 of this Contract, Contractor neglects to make, or undertake
with due diligence to make, the necessary corrections, then Owner is entitled to make, either with
its own forces or with contract forces, the corrections and to recover from Contractor all resulting
costs, expenses, losses, or damages, including attomeys' fees and administrative expenses.
ARTICLE IV: FINANCIAL ASSURANCES
Bonds
Contemporaneous with Contractor's execution of this Contract, Contractor must provide a
Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Payment Bond, on forms provided by, or otherwise
acceptable to, Owner, from a surety company licensed to do business in the State of Illinois with
4.1
-8-
CONTRACT
a general rating of A and a financial size category of Class X or better in Best's Insurance Guide,
each in the penal sum of the Contract Pice ("Bonds"). Contractor, at all times while providing,
performing, or completing the Work, including, without limitation, at all times while correcting
any failure to meet warranty pursuant to Section 3.2 of this Contract, must maintain and keep in
force, at Contractor's expense, the Bonds required hereunder.
4.2 Insurance
Contractor hereby agrees and will, at its expense, carq/ insurance pursuant to the terms,
conditions, and coverages set forth in Attachment A.
4.3 Indemnification
Contractor hereby agrees to and will indemniff and save harmless Owner and all of it
elected officials, officers, employees, attorneys, agents, and representatives against any and all
lawsuits, claims, dernands, damages,liabilities,losses, and expenses, including attomeys' fees and
administrative expenses, that may arise, or be alleged to have arisen, out of or in connection with
Contractor's performance of, or failure to perform, the Work or any part thereot whether or not
due or claimed to be due in whole or in part to the active, passive, or concurent negligence or fault
of Contractor, except to the extent caused solely by the negligence of Owner.
ARTICLE V: PAYMENT
5.1 Contract Price
Owner must pay to Contractor, in accordance with and subject to the terms and conditions
set forth in this Article V and Attachment A, and Contractor must accept in full satisfaction for
providing, performing, and completing the Work, the amount or amounts set forth in Attachment A
(the"Contract Price"), subject to any additions, deductions, or withholdings provided for in this
Contract.
5.2 Taxes and Benefits
Owner is exempt from and will not be responsible to pay, or reimburse Contractor for, any
state or local sales, use, or excise taxes. The Contract Price includes all other applicable federal,
state, and local taxes of every kind and nature applicable to the Work as well as all taxes,
contributions, and premiums for unemployment insurance, old age or retirement benefits,
pensions, annuities, or other similar benefits. All claim or right to claim additional compensation
by reason of the payment of any such tax, contribution, or premium is hereby waived and released
by Contractor.
5.3 Progress Pavments
A. Payment in Installments. The Contract Price must be paid in monthly installments
in the manner set forth in Attachment A ("Progress Payments").
-9¨
CONTRACT
B. Pay Requests. The Village of Oak Brook authorizes the payment of invoices on
the second and fourth Tuesday of the month. For consideration on one of these dates, payment
request must be received no later than fourteen (14) days prior to the second or fourth Tuesday of
the month. Each Pay Request must include (a) Contractor's certification of the value of, and partial
or final waivers of lien covering, all Work for which payment is then requested and
(b) Contractor's certification that all prior Progress Payments have been properly applied to the
payment or reimbursernent of the costs with respect to which they were paid.
C. Work Entire. This Contract and the Work are entire and the Work as a whole is of
the essence of this Contract. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract, each and every
part of this Contract and of the Work are interdependent and common to one another and to
Owner's obligation to pay all or any part of the Contract Price or any other consideration for the
Work. Any and all Progress Payments made pursuant to this Article are provided merely for the
convenience of Contractor and for no other purpose.
5.4 Final Acceptance and Final Pavment
A. Notice of Completion. When the Work has been completed and is ready in all
respects for acceptance by Owner, Contractor must notifu Owner and request a final inspection
("Notice of Completion"). Contractor's Notice of Completion must be given sufficiently in
advance of the Completion Date to allow for scheduling of the final inspection and for completion
or correction before the Completion Date of any items identified by such inspection as being
defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, incomplete, or otherwise not in full
compliance with, or as required by or pursuant to, this Contract ("Punch List Worll').
B. Punch List and Final Acceptance. The Work may be finally accepted when, and
only when, the whole and all parts thereof have been completed to the satisfaction of Owner in full
compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract. Upon receipt of Contractor's
Notice of Completion, Owner must make a review of the Work and notiff Contractor in writing
of all Punch List Work, if any, to be completed or corrected. Following Contractor's completion
or correction of all Punch List Work, Owner must make another review of the Work and prepare
and deliver to Contractor either a written notice of additional Punch List Work to be completed or
corrected or a written notice of final acceptance of the Work ("Final Acceptance").
C. Final Payment. As soon as practicable after Final Acceptance, Contractor must
submit to Owner a properly completed final Pay Request in the form provided by Owner ("Final
Pay Requesf"). Owner must pay to Contractor the balance of the Contract Price, after deducting
therefrom all charges against Contractor as provided for in this Contract ("Final Payment"). Final
Payment must be made not later than 60 days after Owner approves the Final Pay Request. The
acceptance by Contractor of Final Payment will operate as a full and complete release of Owner
of and from any and all lawsuits, claims, demands, damages, liabilities, losses, and expenses of,
by, or to Contractor for anything done, furnished for, arising out of, relating to, or in connection
with the Work or for or on account of any act or neglect of Owner arising out of, relating to, or in
connection with the Work.
‐10-
CONTRACT
5.5 Liens
A. Title. Nothing in this Contract maybe construed as vesting in Contractor any right
of property in any equipment, materials, supplies, and other items provided under this Contract
after they have been installed in, incorporated into, attached to, or affixed to, the Work or the Work
Site. All such equipment, materials, supplies, and other items will, upon being so installed,
incorporated, attached or affixed, become the property of Owner, but such title will not release
Contractor from its duty to insure and protect the Work in accordance with the requirements of
this Contract.
B. Waivers of Lien. Contractormust, from time to time at Owner's request and in any
event prior to Final Payment, furnish to Owner such receipts, releases, affidavits, certificates, and
other evidence as may be necessary to establish, to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner, that no
lien against the Work or the public funds held by Owner exists in favor of any person whatsoever
for or by reason of any equipment, material, supplies, or other item furnished, labor performed, or
other thing done in connection with the Work or this Contract ("Lien") and that no right to file any
Lien exists in favor of any person whatsoever.
C. Removal of Liens. If at any time any notice of any Lien is filed, then Contractor
must, promptly and without charge, discharge, remove, or otherwise dispose of such Lien. Until
such discharge, removal, or disposition, Owner will have the right to retain from any money
payable hereunder an amount that Owner, in its sole judgment, deems necessary to satisfu such
Lien and to pay the costs and expenses, including attomeys' fees and administrative expenses, of
any actions brought in connection therewith or by reason thereof.
D. Protection of Owner Only. This Section does not operate to relieve Contractor's
surety or sureties from any of their obligations under the Bonds, nor may it be deemed to vest any
right, interest, or entitlement in any subcontractor or supplier. Owner's retention of funds pursuant
to this Section is deerned solely for the protection of its own interests pending removal of such
Liens by Contractor, and Owner will have no obligation to apply such funds to such removal but
may, nevertheless, do so where Owner's interests would thereby be served.
5.6 Deductions
A. Owner's fusht to Withhold. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract
and without prejudice to any of Owner's other rights or remedies, Owner will have the right at any
time or times, whether before or after approval of any Pay Request, to deduct and withhold from
any Progress or Final Payment that may be or become due under this Contract such amount as may
reasonably appear necessary to compensate Owner for any acfual or prospective loss due to:
(1) Work that is defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, or incomplete;
(2) damage for which Contractor is liable under this Contract; (3) state or local sales, use, or excise
taxes from which Owner is exempt; (4) Liens or claims of Lien regardless of merit; (5) claims of
subcontractors, suppliers, or other persons regardless of merit; (6) delay in the progress or
completion of the Work; (7) inability of Contractor to complete the Work; (8) failure of Contractor
to properly complete or document any Pay Request; (9) any other failure of Contractor to perform
any of its obligations under this Contract; or (10) the cost to Owner, including attorneys' fees and
…11‐
CONTRACT
administrative costs, of correcting any of the aforesaid matters or exercising any one or more of
Owner's remedies set forth in Section 6.3 of this Contract.
B. Use of Withheld Funds. Owner is entitled to retain any and all amounts withheld
pursuant to Subsection 5.6,4. above until Contractor has either performed the obligations in
question or furnished security for such performance satisfactory to Owner. Owner is entitled to
apply any money withheld or any other money due Contractor under this Contract to reimburse
itself for any and all costs, expenses, losses, damages, liabilities, suits, judgments, awards,
attorneys' fees and administrative expenses incurred, suffered, or sustained by Owner and
chargeable to Contractor under this Contract.
ARTICLE VI: DISPUTES AND REMEDIES
6.1 Dispute Resolution Procedure
A. Notice of Disputes and Objections. If Contractor disputes or objects to any
requirement, direction, instruction, interpretation, determination, or decision of Owner, Contractor
may notify Owner in writing of its dispute or objection and of the amount of any equitable
adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time to which Contractor claims it will be entitled as
a result thereof; provided, however, that Contractor must, nevertheless, proceed without delay to
perform the Work as required, directed, instructed, interpreted, determined, or decided by Owner,
without regard to such dispute or objection. Unless Contractor so notifies Owner within two
business days after receipt of such requirernent, direction, instruction, interpretation,
determination, or decision, Contractor is conclusively deemed to have waived all such disputes or
objections and all claims based thereon.
B. Negotiation of Disputes and Objections. To avoid and settle without litigation any
such dispute or objection, Owner and Contractor agree to engage in good faith negotiations.
Within three business days after Owner's receipt of Contractor's written notice of dispute or
objection, a conference between Owner and Contractor will be held to resolve the dispute. Within
three business days after the end of the conference, Owner must render its final decision, in writing,
to Contractor. If Contractor objects to the final decision of Owner, then it must, within three
business days, give Owner notice thereof and, in such notice, must state its final demand for
settlement of the dispute. Unless Contractor so notifies Owner, Contractor will be conclusively
deemed (1) to have agreed to and accepted Owner's final decision and (2) to have waived all
claims based on such final decision.
6.2 Contractor's Remedies
If Owner fails or refuses to satisff a final demand made by Contractor pursuant to
Section 6.1 of this Contract, or to otherwise resolve the dispute which is the subject of such demand
to the satisfaction of Contractor, within l0 days after receipt of such demand, then Contractor will
be entitled to pursue such remedies, not inconsistent with the provisions of this Contract, as it may
have in law or equity.
‐12-
CONTRACT
6.3 Owner's Remedies
If it should appear at any time prior to Final Payment that Contractor has failed or refused
to prosecute, or has delayed in the prosecution of, the Work with diligence at a rate that assures
completion of the Work in full compliance with the requirements of this Contract on or before the
Completion Date, or has attempted to assign this Contract or Contractor's rights under this
Contract, either in whole or in part, or has falsely made any representation or warranty in this
Contract, or has otherwise failed, refused, or delayed to perform or satisfu any other requirement
of this Contract or has failed to pay its debts as they come d:ue ("Event of Default"), and has failed
to cure any such Event of Default within five business days after Contractor's receipt of written
notice of such Event of Default, then Owner will have the right, at its election and without
prejudice to any other remedies provided by law or equity, to pursue any one or more of the
following remedies:
1. Owner may require Contractor, within such reasonable time as may be fixed by
Owner, to complete or correct all or any part of the Work that is defective, damaged,
flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, or incomplete; to remove from the Work Site
any such Work; to accelerate all or any part of the Work; and to take any or all other
action necessary to bring Contractor and the Work into strict compliance with this
Contract.
Owner may perform or have performed all Work necessary for the accomplishment
of the results stated in Paragraph I above and withhold or recover from Contractor
all the cost and expense, including attorneys' fees and administrative costs, incurred
by Owner in connection therewith.
Owner may accept the defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming,
incomplete, or dilatory Work or part thereof and make an equitable reduction in the
Contract Price.
Owner may terminate this Contract without liability for further payment of amounts
due or to become due under this Contract.
Owner may, without terminating this Contract, terminate Contractor's rights under
this Contract and, for the purpose of completing or correcting the Work, evict
Contractor and take possession of all equipment, materials, supplies, tools,
appliances, plans, specifications, schedules, manuals, drawings, and other papers
relating to the Work, whether at the Work Site or elsewhere, and either complete or
correct the Work with its own forces or contracted forces, all at Contractor's
expense.
Upon any termination of this Contract or of Contractor's rights under this Contract,
and at Owner's option exercised in writing, any or all subcontracts and supplier
contracts of Contractor will be deemed to be assigned to Owner without any further
action being required, but Owner may not thereby assume any obligation for
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
…13-
CONTRACT
payments due under such subcontracts and supplier contracts for any Work
provided or performed prior to such assignment.
7. Owner may withhold from any Progress Payment or Final Payment, whether or not
previously approved, or may recover from Contractor, any and all costs, including
attorneys' fees and administrative expenses, incurred by Owner as the result of any
Event of Default or as a result of actions taken by Owner in response to any Event
of Default.
8. Owner may recover any damages suffered by Owner.
6.4 Owner's Additional Remedv for Delav
If the Work is not completed by Contractor, in full compliance with, and as required by or
pursuant to, this Contract, within the Contract Time as such time may be extended by Change
Order, then Owner may invoke its remedies under Section 6.3 of this Contract or may, in the
exercise of its sole and absolute discretion, permit Contractor to complete the Work but charge to
Contractor, and deduct from any Progress or Final Payments, whether or not previously approved,
administrative expenses and costs for each day completion of the Work is delayed beyond the
Completion Date, computed on the basis of the "Per Diem Administrative Charge" set forth in
Attachment A, as well as any additional damages caused by such delay.
6.5 Terminations and Suspensions Deemed for Convenience
Any termination or suspension of Contractor's rights under this Contract for an alleged
default that is ultimately held unjustified will automatically be deerned to be a termination or
suspension for the convenience of Owner under Section I . I 5 of this Contract.
ARTICLE VII: LEGAL RELATIONSHIPS
AND REQUIREMENTS
7.1 Bindine Effect
This Contract is binding on Owner and Contractor and on their respective heirs, executors,
administrators, personal representatives, and permitted successors and assigns. Every reference in
this Contract to a party is deerned to be a reference to the authorized officers, employees, agents,
and representatives of such party.
7.2 Relationship of the Parties
Contractor will act as an independent contractor in providing and performing the Work.
Nothing in, nor done pursuant to, this Contract may be construed (1) to create the relationship of
principal and agent, partners, or joint venturers between Owner and Contractor or (2) except as
provided in Paragraph 6.3(6) above, to create any relationship between Owner and any
subcontractor or supplier of Contractor.
-14-
CONTRACT
7.3 NoCollusion/Prohibitedlnterests
Contractor hereby represents that the only persons, firms, or corporations interested in this
Contract as principals are those disclosed to Owner prior to the execution of this Contract, and that
this Contract is made without collusion with any other person, firm, or corporation. If at any time
it is found that Contractor has, in procuring this Contract, colluded with any other person, firm, or
corporation, then Contractor will be liable to Owner for all loss or damage that Owner may suffer
thereby, and this Contract will, at Owner's option, be null and void.
Contractor hereby represents and warrants that neither Contractor nor any person affiliated
with Contractor or that has an economic interest in Contractor or that has or will have an interest
in the Work or will participate, in any manner whatsoever, in the Work is acting, directly or
indirectly, for or on behalf of any person, goup, entity or nation named by the United States
Treasury Department as a Specially Designated National and Blocked Person, or for or on behalf
of any person, goup, entity or nation designated in Presidential Executive Order 13224 as a person
who commits, threatens to commit, or supports terrorism, and neither Contractor nor any person
affiliated with Contractor or that has an economic interest in Contractor or that has or will have an
interest in the Work or will participate, in any manner whatsoever, in the Work is, directly or
indirectly, engaged in, or facilitating, the Work on behalf of any such person, group, entity or
nation.
7.4 Assisnment
Contractor may not (1) assign this Contract in whole or in part, (2) assign any of
Contractor's rights or obligations under this Contract, or (3) assign any payment due or to become
due under this Contract without the prior express written approval of Owner, which approval may
be withheld in the sole and unfettered discretion of Owner; provided, however, that Owner's prior
written approval will not be required for assignments of accounts, as defined in the Illinois
Commercial Code, if to do so would violate Section 9-318 of the Illinois Commercial Code, 810
ILCS 5/9-318. Owner may assign this Contract, in whole or in part, or any or all of its rights or
obligations under this Contract, without the consent of Contractor.
7.5 Confidentiallnformation
All information supplied by Owner to Contractor for or in connection with this Contract or
the Work must be held confidential by Contractor and may not, without the prior express written
consent of Owner, be used for any purpose other than performance of the Work.
7.6 No Waiver
No examination, inspection, investigation, test, measurement, review, determination,
decision, certificate, or approval by Owner, nor any order by Owner for the payment of money,
nor any payment for, or use, occupancy, possession, or acceptance ol the whole or any part of the
Work by Owner, nor any extension of time granted by Owner, nor any delay by Owner in
exercising any right under this Contract, nor any other act or omission of Owner may constitute or
be deemed to be an acceptance of any defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming or
-15‐
CONTRACT
incomplete Work, equipment, materials, or supplies, nor operate to waive or otherwise diminish
the effect of any warranty or representation made by Contractor; or of any requirement or provision
of this Contract; or of any remedy, power, or right of Owner.
7.7 No Third Partv Beneficiaries
No claim as a third party beneficiary under this Contract by any person, firm, or corporation
other than Contractor may be made or be valid against Owner.
7.8 Notices
All notices required or permitted to be glven under this Contract must be in writing and are
deemed received by the addressee thereof when delivered in person on a business day at the address
set forth below or on the third business day after being deposited in any main or branch United
States post office, for delivery at the address set forth below by properly addressed, postage
prepaid, certified or registered mail, retum receipt requested.
Notices and communications to Owner must be addressed to, and delivered at, the
following address:
Village of Oak Brook
1200 Oak Brook Road
Oak Brook, Illinois 60523
Attention: Doug Patchin, Public Works Director
Notices and communications to Contractor must be addressed to, and delivered at, the
following address:
Construction Solutions of Il.. Inc.
12540 S. Holidav Drive. Unit D
Alsip. Illinois 60803
Attn: Peter Schipma. President
The foregoing may not be deemed to preclude the use of other non-oral means of
notification or to invalidate any notice properly given by any such other non-oral means.
By notice complying with the requirements of this Section, Owner and Contractor each
have the right to change the address or addressee or both for all future notices to it, but no notice
of a change of address is effective until actually received.
7.9 Governing Laws
This Contract and the rights of Owner and Contractor under this Contract will be
interpreted according to the internal laws, but not the conflict of laws rules, of the State of Illinois;
venue for any action related to this Contract will be in the Circuit Court of DuPage County, Illinois.
…16-
CONTRACT
7.10 Chanses in Laws
Unless otherwise explicitly provided in this Contract, any reference to laws includes such
laws as they may be amended or modified from time to time.
7.ll Compliance with Laws
A. Compliance Required. Contractor must give all notices, pay all fees, and take all
other action that may be necessary to ensure that the Work is provided, performed, and completed
in accordance with all required governmental permits, licenses or other approvals and
authorizations that maybe required in connection with providing, performing, and completing the
Work, and with all applicable statutes, ordinances, rules, and regulations, including without
limitation the Illinois Prevailing Wage Act, 820 ILCS 130/0.01 et seq. (see Subsection C of this
Section) (a copy of the prevailing rate of wages ascertained by the lllinois Department of Labor,
in effect as of the date of this Contract, has been attached as an Appendix to this Contract; if the
Illinois Department of Laborrevises the prevailing rate of hourly wages to be paid, the revised rate
applies to this Contract); any other applicable prevailing wage laws; the Fair Labor Standards Act;
any statutes regarding qualification to do business; any statutes requiring preference to laborers of
specified classes; the Illinois Steel Products Procurement Act, 30 ILCS 56511 et seq.; any statutes
prohibiting discrimination because of, or requiring affirmative action based on, race, creed, color,
national origin, age, sex, or other prohibited classification, including, without limitation, the
Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990,42 U.S.C. $$ l2l0l et seq., the Illinois Human Rights
Act,775 ILCS 5/l-101 et seq., and the Public Works Discrimination Act, 775 ILCS 10/0.01 et
seq.; and any statutes regarding safety or the performance of the Work, including the Illinois
Underground Utility Facilities Damage Prevention Act, 220 ILCS 50/l et seq., and the
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970,29 U.S.C. $$ 651 et seq.
B. Liabilitlz for Fines. Penalties. Contractor is solely liable for any fines or civil
penalties that are imposed by any governmental or quasi-governmental agency or body that may
arise, or be alleged to have arisen, out of or in connection with Contractor's, or its subcontractors'
or suppliers', performance of or failure to perform, the Work or any part thereof.
C. Prevailing Waee Act. Contractor and each subcontractor, in order to comply with
the Prevailing Wage Act, 820 ILCS 130/0.01 et seq. (the "Act"), must submit to the Village a
certified payroll on a monthly basis, in accordance with Section 5 of the Act. The certified payroll
must consist of a complete copy of those records required to be made and kept by the Act. The
certified payroll must be accompanied by a statement signed by the contractor or subcontractor
that certifies that (l) such records are true and accurate, (2) the hourly rate paid is not less than the
general prevailing rate of hourly wages required by the Act, and (3) the contractor or subcontractor
is aware that filing a certified payroll that he or she knows to be false is a Class B misdemeanor.
Contractor may rely on the certification of a subcontractor, provided that Contractor does not
knowingly rely on a subcontractor's false certification. On two business days' notice, Contractor
and each subcontractor must make available for inspection the records required to be made and
kept by the Act (i) to the Village and its officers and agents and to the Director of the Illinois
Department of Labor and his or her deputies and agents and (ii) at all reasonable hours at a location
within the State.
-17-
CONTRACT
D. Required Provisions Deemed Inserted. Every provision of law required by law to
be inserted into this Contract is deemed to be inserted herein.
7.12 Compliance with Patents
A. Assumption of Costs. Royalties. and Fees. Contractor will pay or cause to be paid
all costs, royalties, and fees arising from the use on, or the incorporation into, the Work, of patented
equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions.
B. Effect of Contractor Beine Enjoined. Should Contractor be enjoined from
furnishing or using any equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or
inventions supplied or required to be supplied or used under this Contract, Contractor must
promptly offer substitute equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or
inventions in lieu thereof, of equal efficiency, quality, suitability, and market value, for review by
Owner. If Owner should disapprove the offered substitutes and should elect, in lieu of a
substitution, to have supplied, and to retain and use, any such equipment, materials, supplies, tools,
appliances, devices, processes, or inventions as may by this Contract be required to be supplied,
Contractor must pay such royalties and secure such valid licenses as may be requisite and
necessary for Owner to use such equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices,
processes, or inventions without being disturbed or in any way interfered with by any proceeding
in law or equity on account thereof. Should Contractor neglect or refuse to make any approved
substitution promptly, or to pay such royalties and secure such licenses as may be necessary, then
Owner will have the right to make such substitution, or Owner may pay such royalties and secure
such licenses and charge the cost thereof against any money due Contractor from Owner or recover
the amount thereof from Contractor and its surety or sureties notwithstanding that Final Payment
may have been made.
7.13 Time
The Contract Time is of the essence of this Contract. Except where otherwise stated,
references in this Contract to days is construed to refer to calendar days.
7.14 Severabilitv
The provisions of this Contract will be interpreted when possible to sustain their legality
and enforceability as a whole. In the event any provision of this Contract is held invalid, illegal,
or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, in whole or in part, neither the validity of
the remaining part of such provision, nor the validity of any other provisions of this Contract will
be in any way affected thereby.
7.15 Entire Agreement
This Contract sets forth the entire agreement of Owner and Contractor with respect to the
accomplishment of the Work and the payment of the Contract Price therefor, and there are no other
-18‐
CONTRACT
llnderstandings or agreelnents,oral or written,between Owner and Contractor with respectto the
wOrk and the compensation therefor.
7.16 AIllendlllents
No modiflcation,addition,deletion,revision,alteration or other change to this Contract is
effective unless and until such change is reduced to wnting and executed and delivered by Owner
and Contractor.
[SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS]
…19-
CONTRACT
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have caused this Contract to be executed
by their properly authorized representatives in two original counterparts as of the Effective Date.
By:
Name:
Title:
CONSTRUI
By:
Name:
Title:
Attest:
By:
Name:
Title:
OAK BR
‐20‐
CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION
STATE OF ILLINOIS
COUNTY OF ce-\
)
)
)
SS
CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION
ylr/e 's executing ollicerJ, being
first duly sworn on oath, deposes ahd states that all statements herein made are made on behaft
of Contractor, that this deponent is authorizedto make them, and that the statements contained
herein are true and correct.
Contractor deposes, states, and certifies that Contractor is not barred from contracting
with a unit of state or local government as a result of (i) a violation of either Section 33E-3 or
Section 338-4 of Article 33E of the Criminal Code of 196l,720ILCS 5/33E-l et seq.; or (ii) a
violation of the USA Patriot Act of 2001, 107 Public Law 56 (October 26,2OOl) (the"Patriot
Act") or other statutes, orders, rules, and regulations of the United States goveflrment and its
various executive departments, agencies and offices related to the subject matter of the Patriot
Act, including, but not limited to, Executive Order 13224 effective September 24,2001.
DATED: /^ 6 ,20!_a.
CONTRA
Name:
Title:
By:
Name:
Title:
Subscribed and Sworn to before me on (* Xf , zlJ-fr
(sEAL)
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROECT
ATTACHMENT A
SUPPLEMENTAL SCHEDULE OF CONTRACT TERMS
[Check applicable boxes and insert required information.J
1. Proiect:
Renovation of the existing bunk room, and removal of existing flooring materials in
bunk room as indicated in the drawings and described herein. The general contractor
shall provide and install all materials, unless noted otherwise. Scope of work includes,
but not necessarily limited to, general interior dernolition of existing walls and flooring,
new metal stud framing with gypsum wall board finish; wood trim, new electrical
receptacles and fixtures, modification of existing electrical can lights, ceiling patching,
painting, and install all new casework including the legacy lockers, as well as finished
wood bases, end panels, hardware and all accessories as shown on the drawings and
described herein. Alternate Bid includes providing and installing new carpeting in Fire
Station 93 Bunk Room (demolition for this work is part of the base bid.
2. Work Site:
Fire Station 93,725 Enterprise Drive, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523.
3. Permits. Licenses. Approvals. and Authorizations:
Contractor must obtain all required govemmental permits, licenses, approvals, and
authorizations.
4. Commencement Date:
No work is to begin until all product and material are on site at Fire
no event later than erugrst2+.2eJ€- a*oe.a A, a O, E
Completion Date:
Substantial Completion by Sep*mberJ##f8. The Completion Date will be subject
to equitable adjustment if the Commencernent Date is delayed pursuant to Subsection
2.2A of the Contract.
N"ettrこ ■OJ轟 夕∠gュ
ATTACHMENT A
Insurance Coverage:
Certificates of Insurance shall be presented to Owner within fifteen (15) days after the
receipt by the Contractor of the Notice of Award and the unexecuted contract, it being
understood and agreed that the Owner will not approve and execute the Contract until
acceptable insurance certificates are received and approved by Owner.
Each contractor performing any work pursuant to a contract with Owner and each permittee
working under a permit as required pursuant to the provisions of Title I of Chapter 8 of the
Code of Ordinances of the Village of Oak Brook (hereinafter referred to as "Insured") shall
be required to carry such insurance as specified herein. Such contractor and permittee shall
procure and maintain for the duration of the contract or permit insurance against claims for
injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from or in connection with the
performance of the work under the contract or permit, either by the contractor, permittee, or
their agents, representatives, employees or subcontractors.
A contractor or permittee shall maintain insurance with limits no less than:
A. General Liability - $2,000,000 combined single limit per occrrrence for bodily injury,
personal injury and property damage, provided that when the estimated cost of the
work in question does not exceed $25,000, the required limit shall be $1,000,000;
B. Automobile Liability (if applicable) - $1,000,000 combined single limit per accident
for bodily injury and property damage;
C. Worker's Comporsation and Employer's Liability - Worker's Compensation limits as
required by the Labor Code of the State of Illinois and Employer's Liability limits of
$1,000,000 per accident.
Any deductibles or self-insured retention must be declared to and approved by Owner. At
the option of Owner, either the insurer shall reduce or eliminate such deductible or self-
insured retention as respect to Owner, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers; or
the Insured shall procure a bond guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigations,
claim administration and defense expenses to the extent of such deductible or self-insured
retention.
The policies shall contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions:
D. General Liability and Automobile Liability Coverage -
(1) The Owner, its officers, officials, employees and volunteem are to be covered
as additional insureds as respects: liability arising out of activities performed
by or on behalf of the lnsured; premises owned, occupied or used by the
Insured. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of
protection aflorded to the Owner, its officers, officials, onployees, volunteers,
or agents.
-2-
ATTACⅡMENT A
(2) The Insured's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respect to the
Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers and agents. Any insurance
or self-insurance maintained by the Owner, its officers, officials, employees,
volunteers or agents shall be in excess of the Insured's insurance and shall not
contribute with it.
(3) Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not af[ect
coverage provided to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers
or agents.
(4) The Insured's insurance shall apply separately to each covered party against
whom claim is made or suit is brought except with respect to the limits of the
insurer's liability.
E. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability Coverage
The policy shall waive all rights of subrogation against the Owner, its officers,
ofEcials, employees, volunteers and agents for losses arising from work
performed by the insured for the Owner.
Each insurance policy shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be suspended,
voided, canceled by either party, reduced in coverage or in limits except after thirty (30)
days prior written notice by certified mail has been given to Owner. Each insurance policy
shall name the Owner, its officers, officials and employees, volunteers and agents as
Additional Insureds. Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a Best's rating of no less
than A: VII.
Each Insured shall fumish the Owner with certificates of insurance and with original
endorsements effecting coverage required by this provision. The certificate and
endorsements for each insurance policy are to be signed by a person authorized by that
insurer to bind coverage on its behalf. The certificates and endorsements are to be on forms
approved by the Owner and shall be subject to approval by the Village Attorney before
work commences. The Owner reserves the right to require complete, certified copies of
all required instrance policies, at any time.
Each insured shall include all subcontractors as insureds under its policies or shall furnish
separate certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. All coverages for
subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein.
trD Builders Risk Insurance. This insurance must be written in completed value
form, must protect Contractor and Owner against "all risks" of direct physical
loss to buildings, structures, equipment, and materials to be used in providing,
performing, ffid completing the Work, including without limitation fire
extended coverage, vandalism and malicious mischief, sprinkler leakage, flood,
-3-
trE
G.
XH.
F.
ATTACHMENT A
earth movement and collapse, and must be designed for the circumstances that
may affect the Work.
This insurance must be written with limits not less than the insurable value of
the Work at completion. The insurable value must include the aggregate value
of Owner-fumished equipment and materials to be constructed or installed by
Contractor.
This insurance must include coverage while equipment or materials are in
warehouses, during installation, during testing, and after the Work is completed,
but prior to Final Payment. This insurance must include coverage while Owner
is occupying all or arry part of the Work prior to Final Payment without the need
for the insurance company's consent.
Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. Contractor, at its sole
cost and expense, must purchase this Insurance in the name of Owner with a
combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage of not less than
$1,000,000.
Umbrella Policy. The required coverage may be in the form of an umbrella
policy above $2,000,000 primary coverage. All umbrella policies must provide
excess coverage over underlying insurance on a following-form basis so that,
when any loss covered by the primary policy exceeds the limits under the
primary policy, the excess or umbrella policy becomes effective to cover that
loss.
Deductible.
more than $
Each policy must have a deductible or self-insured retention of not
Owner as Additional Insured. Owner must be named as an Additional Insured
on the following policies:
General Liabilitv
The Additional lnsured endorsement must identiff Owner as follows:
The Village of Oak Brook and its boards, commissions, committees, authorities,
ernployees, agencies, officers, voluntary associations, and other units operating
under the jurisdiction and within the appointment of its budget.
-4-
XATTACⅡMENT A
Other Parties as Additional Insureds. In addition to Owner, the following parties
must be named as additional insured on the following policies:
Additional Insured
Arcon Associates Inc.
7. Contract Price:
Policy or Policies
8.
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
A. LUMP SUM CONTRACT
1. Provide and install all materials needed for the renovation of the existing Fire Station
93 Bunk Room and dernolition of existing flooring. For providing, performing, and
completing Work, the total Contract Price of :
$ 71.723.00
In words Seventy-One Thousand Seven Hundred and Twenty-Three Dollars
2. Alternate Bid:
Provide and install new carpeting in Bunk Room. Demolition for this work is part
of the base bid.
$
ln words
Progress Pavments:
A. General. Owner must pay to Contractor 90 percent of the Value of Work,
determined in the manner set forth below, installed and complete in place up to
the day before the Pay Request, less the aggregate of all previous Progress
Payments. The total amount of Progress Payments made prior to Final
Acceptance by Owner may not exceed 90 percent of the Contract Price.
B. Value of Work. The Value of the Work will be determined as follows:
(l) Lump Sum Items. For all Work to be paid on a lump sum basis,
Contractor must, not later than l0 days after execution of the Contract
and before submitting its first Pay Request, submit to Owner a schedule
showing the value of each component part of such Work in form and
with substantiating data acceptable to Owner ("Breakdown Schedule").
-5-
ATTACHMENT A
The sum of the items listed in the Breakdown Schedule must equal the
amount or amounts set forth in the Schedule of Prices for Lump Sum
Work. An unbalanced Breakdown Schedule providing for overpaynent
of Contractor on component parts of the Work to be performed first will
not be accepted. The Breakdown Schedule must be revised and
resubmitted until acceptable to Owner. No payment may be made for
any lump sum item until Contractor has submitted, and Owner has
approved, an acceptable Breakdown Schedule.
Owner may require that the approved Breakdown Schedule be revised
based on developments occurring during the provision and performance
of the Work. If Contractor fails to submit a revised Breakdown Schedule
that is acceptable to Owner, Owner will have the right either to suspend
Progress and Final Payments for Lump Sum Work or to make such
Payments based on Owner's determination of the value of the Work
completed.
(2) Unit Price Items. For all Work to be paid on a unit price basis, the value
of such Work will be determined by Owner on the basis of the actual
number of acceptable units of Unit Price Items installed and complete in
place, multiplied by the applicable Unit Price set forth in the Schedule
of Prices. The actual number of acceptable units installed and complete
in place will be measured on the basis described in Attachment B to the
Contract or, in the absence of such description, on the basis determined
by Owner. The number of units of Unit Price Items stated in the
Schedule of Prices are Owner's estimate only and may not be used in
establishing the Progress or Final Payments due Contractor. The
Contract Price will be adjusted to reflect the actual number of acceptable
units of Unit Price ltems installed and complete in place upon Final
Acceptance.
C. Application of Payments. All Progress and Final Payments made by Owner to
Contractor will be applied to the payment or reimbursement of the costs with
respect to which they were paid and will not be applied to or used for any pre-
existing or unrelated debt between Contractor and Owner or between Contractor
and any third party.
Per Diem Administrative Charse:
$500 per day.
Standard Specifications:
The Contract also includes Owner's Village Code and Building Codes.
9。
10。
-6-
ATTACⅡⅣIENT A
References to any of these codes means the latest editions effective on the date of the bid
opening.
See A■achment D for any special pr●ect requirelnents.
-7-
ATTACⅡMENT B
ⅥLLAGE OF OAK BR00K
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROЛ CT
ATTACHMENT B
SPECIFICATIONS
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
BUNK R00M RENOVATION
OAK BR00K Π RE DEPARTMENT
STATION 93
725 ENTERPRISE DRIVE
OAK BR00K,ILLINOIS 60523
JIINE 12,2018
PROJECT NO.15095.2
0WNER:V11■AGE OF OAK BR00K
12CX10AK BR00K ROAD
OAK BR00K,ILLINOIS 60523
ARCⅢTECT:ARCON ASSOCIATES,INC.
2050S.Π NLEY ROAD,SIЛ TE 40
LOttARD,ILLINOIS 60148
CONSULTANT:AMSCO ENGINEERING
5115 BELMONT ROAD
DOWNERS GROVE,ILLINOIS 60515
AT
ARCON 15095。2000101‐1TITLE PAGE
TABLE OF CONttNTS
DIVISION CICI‐PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENIIS
Section 00 01 01‐Title Page
Sectton 00 01 10‐Table of Contents
DIVIS10N 01‐GENERAL REQUIRElИ ENTS
Section 01 00 00‐General Requirements
Section 01 23 00‐Altemates
Section 01 33 00-Shop Drawings,Product I)ata and Samples
DIVISION 02‐EXISTING CONDITIONS
Section 02 41 19‐Selective l)emolition
DIVIS10N 06¨W00D,PLASTICS AND COMPOSEES
Section 06 10 01‐Rough Carpen町
Section 06 40 00‐InteHor Architectural Woodwork
DIVISION I19‐FINISHES
Secdon 09 21 16‐Gypsum Board Assemblies
Section 09 50 00‐Ceilings
Scction 09 65 00-Resilient Floo五 ng
Section 09 68 10‐Carpet Tlle
Section 09 90 00-Painting
DIVISION 26‐ELECTRICAL
Section 26 00 10-Basic Electrical Requirements
Section 26 05 19‐Building Wire
Section 26 05 29‐Cutting,Patching,Sleeves,Hangers,and Supports
Section 26 05 34‐Conduit
Section 26 05 37‐Boxes
Section 26 05 53‐IdentiFlcation For Electrical Systems
Section 26 27 17-Equipment WЫ ng
Section 26 27 26‐W五 ngl)evices
DIVISION 27‐COMMUNICATIONS
Section 27 10 05-Structured Cabling for Voice and l)ata―Insidc Plant
000101_1
000110_1
01(Ю 00_1_10
012300-1-2
013300‐1‐40241 19-1-5
061001_1-4
064000-14
0921 16-1‐10
095000-1-5
096500-1‐6096810-1_6
099000-1_14
260010_1‐9260519-1-7
260529-1‐3260534-1‐8260537-1‐6260553-1‐6262717‐1‐2262726-1‐5271005-1‐15
ARCON 15095.2 000110…1TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 01 00 00
GENERAL REQUIREDIENTS
PART l GENERAL
l.01 LOCAL CODES
A. Each Contractor complies wlth specifled and applicable codes and standards. If conflict
between codes or standards and drawings,speciflcations or addenda requirements,rnore
stnngent requirements shal1 80Vem.
1.02 RELATED DOCtIMENTS
A. Drawings and general pro宙 sions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Speciflcation Sections,apply to this sectiOn.
Bo Sections of E)ivision 01 shall govem the execution ofthe work of all sectiOns of the
speciflcations.
1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall comply with an applicable fedeFl,state,and locallaws,regulatiOns,
ordinances,cOdes for standards conceming environlnental contr01. Particular attention shan be
given,without limitation,to:
1. Reduction of air pollution by control ofremse buming(if pernutted),nininizatiOn of
dust,contalnlnent of chemcal vapors,cOntrol of engine cxhaust gases,and control of
smoke ttom temporaり heaters.
2. Reduction of water pollutiOn by contr01 0f sanitary facilities,prOper stOrage of ftels and
other potential contaminants,and prevention of siltation■om land erosion.
3. Minimization of noise levels.
4. Proper and legal disposal,or site unless otherwise provided,of waste and soil resulting
■o■l cOnstruction activities.
5. Proper and legal disposal of excavated spoils resulting ionl construction activities per
11linois Public Act 96-1416 and thc lninois Environlnental Protection Agency.
6. Proper and legal disposal at acceptable landflH of non―hazardous special waste if soil
analysis detemines that excavated spoils are not suitable for a Ccl)D Facility
l.04 SUBSTITUTIONS(``OR EQUAL'')
A. The Contractor or any Subcontractor's Proposal shall be based upon the lnate」als,cquipment,or
processes speciflcany named in the Contract I)ocuments. 1「he word∥processes"as used herein
includes inethOds or systems of construction.
B. Products are generally specined by ASTM or other reference standard,and/Or by manufactureris
name and modei number Ortrade nalne. When specifled only by reference standard,the
Contractor rnay select any product meeting this standard,by any manufacturer When scveral
products Or rnanufacturers are specifled as being equally acceptable,the Contractor has the
option of using any product and inanufacturer combinatlon listed.
C. Before the Pre―bid Meeting,orin the absence thereof 10 days pHor tO the Bid(Dpe」ng,the
Owner and Architect will consider a fomal request for the substitution of products in place of
those specifled under the fonowlng conditions:
1. The request is accompanied by complete data on the proposed substitutiOn substantiating
ARCON 15095。2 ol oo oO‐l GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
compliance with the Contract Documents, including product identification and
description, performance and test data, references and samples where applicable, and an
itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the products specified with data
relating to Contract Time Schedule, design and artistic effect where applicable, and its
relationship to separate contracts.
2. The request is accompanied by accurate cost data on the proposed substitution in
comparison with the product specified, whether or not modif,rcation of the Contract Sum
is to be a consideration.
D. Request for substitution based on paragraph above, when forwarded by the Contractor to the
Architect, are understood to mean that the Contractor:
1. Represents that he has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and
determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified;2. Will provide the same guarante€ for the substitution that he would for that specified;3. Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this
contract, but excludes costs under separate contracts and the Architect's re-design cost,
and that he waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which
subsequently become apparent; and
4. Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be
required for the work to be completed in all respects.5. The Owner and Architect do not have to consider substitutions after the Pre- bid Meeting.
No substitutions shall be made unless acceptable to the Owner and Architect in writing.
1.05 TEMPORARY SERVICES
A. Contractor shall provide own power.
B' Water is available from the building, Contractor shall field verify locations prior to bid.
C. Owner will not provide access to toilet facilities.
D. Contractor will provide his own temporary office and phone, if needed or required.
E. Contractor will remove all temporary facilities upon completion of the project.
1.06 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
B.
C.
The Contractor, within 14 calendar days from the contract date, shall prepare and submit for the
Architect's review an estimated Construction Schedule for the work. The Construction Schedule
shall be related to the entire project to the extent required by the Contract Documents. This
schedule shall indicate the dates forthe starting and completion ofthe various stages of
construction and shall be revised as required by the conditions ofthe work, subject to the
Owner's approval.
The Construction Schedule shall be coordinated with the "Shop Drawings and Product Data"
schedule called for in Division 01 Section "Shop Drawings and Product Data". Both schedules
shall be submitted at the same time.
If the work falls behind the approved Construction Schedule, the Owner shall have the authority
to direct the Contractor to perform overtime work and holiday work, with the affected
subcontractors, to maintain the schedule. This work shall be performed at no additional cost to
the Owner.
The Contractor and all Subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturers shall schedule materials,
deliveries and installations to conform with the Construction Schedule and provisions to this
D.
ARCON 15095。2010000‐2GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
effect shall be included in all subcontracts.
It is understood and agreed by all the Contractors that the materials, tools, equipment, building
or work is entirely at their risk until same is completed. The Owner assumes no responsibility
for the loss by theft or damage.
The Owner and other Contractors may be working at the site during the performance of the
contract. The Owner reserves the right to direct the Contractor to schedule the order of this
work in such a manner as to not unreasonably interfere with the performance by the Owner and
other Contractors.
1.07 CONTRACTOR INSPEC■ON
The Contractor shall inspect and supervise the work to be assured that the work is performed in
accordance with contract requirements.
The Contractor shall reject or stop portions of the work which are not in accordance with
contract requirements.
By requesting the Final Payment, each prime Contractor certifies that he has provided his work
in compliance with the specifications and drawings.
1.08 CLEノ 唖嘔NG
E.FThe premises and the job site shall be maintained in a neat and orderly condition and kept free
from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish during the entire construction period,
removing all crates, cartons and other flammable waste materials or trash from the working areas
as required.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the general cleaning and maintenance ofthe premises
and the job and the coordination and direction of the clean- up of all his Subcontractors. If the
premises and jobsite are not maintained properly, the Owner may have any accumulations of
waste materials or trash removed and charge the cost to the Contractor responsible therefore. If
responsibility cannot be determined, the cost shall be prorated among, Contractors.
Pipe and duct shafts, chases, funed spaces, and similar spaces which are generally unfinished,
shall be cleaned by each Contractor as he finishes his work and left free from rubbish, loose
plaster, mortar drippings, extraneous construction materials, dirt and dust before preliminary
inspection of the work.
All areas of the building in which painting and finishing work is to be performed shall be
cleaned throughout just prior to the start of this work, and these areas shall be maintained in
satisfactory clean condition for painting and finish. This cleaning shall include the removal of
trash and rubbish from these areas; broom cleaning of floors; the removal of any plaster, mortar,
dust and other extraneous materials from all finish surfaces, including but not limited to, all
exposed structural steel, miscellaneous metal, woodwork, plaster, masonry, concrete, mechanical
and electrical equipment, piping, ductwork, conduit, and also all surfaces visible after all
permanent fixtures, grilles, registers, and such other fixtures or devices are in place.
1.09 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE
The contractor shall maintain, at the site, for the owner, one copy of all Drawings,
Specifications, Addenda, approved Shop Drawings, Change Orders and other Modifications, in
good order and marked to record all changes made during construction. These shall be available
to the Architect. The Drawings, marked to record all changes made during construction shall be
delivered to the Architect for the Owner upon completion of the work.
A.
C.
A.
B.
C.
D.
ARCON 15095.2 010000‐3GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
B. Permit drawings shall be maintained at the site in accordance with local requirements.
I.IO ACCIDENTS AND SAFETY RESPONSIBILITY
A. The general or prime contractor is solely responsible for supervision, monitoring, and
maintaining safe working conditions on, in and around the construction site. The Architect, his
consultants and owner are not responsible for the safety conditions on the construction site.
B. The Contractor shall report any and all accidents on the site or related to the project in writing to
his insurance company and to the Owner and Architect within 24 hours of occurrence. The
report shall contain the following information:
l. Name and address of injured person or persons;
2. Locationofoccurrence;
3. Date and time of occurrence;
4. Narrative description ofthe accident and how it occurred;5. Extent of injuries, hospital where treated name or names of physicians in attendance;6. Names of witnesses and, whenever possible, statements of witnesses and the name of
person taking such statement;
7. SignatureofContractor'ssuperintendent.
C. In addition, ifdeath or serious injuries or serious damages are caused, the accident shall be
reported to the Architect, and to the Owner immediately by telephone or messenger. If any
claim is made by anyone against the Contractor or any Subconfiactor on account ofany accident,
the Contractor shall promptly report the facts in writing to the Architect giving full details of the
claim.
I.I I TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A. The Owner may employ and pay for an independent testing laboratory to perform inspection
sampling and testing of, but not limited to: soils, concrete, masonry, steel, test and balance, and
fireproofing.
B. Employment of testing laboratory will in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform
work in accordance with the contract.
C. Contractor shall cooperate with laboratory personnel and patch all surfaces and areas disturbed
by testing operations.
I.I2 COMPLETION
A. The Contractor shall:
l. Submit written certification, to Architect, that work is complete.2. Submit list of major items to be completed or corrected.
B. The Architect will make an inspection within ten (10) working days after receipt of certification,
together with Owner's Representative.
C. Should Architect consider that work is complete:
1. Contractor will prepare, and submit to Architect, a list of items to be completed or
corrected, as determined by the inspection.
2. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Completion, containing:
ARCON 15095。2010000¨4GENERAL REQUIRE卜 IENTS
a. Proposed Date of Completion.
b. Conhactor's list of items to be completed or corrected, verified and amended by
Architect.
c. The time within which Confractor shall complete or correct work of listed items.d. Time and date Owner will assume possession of work or designated portion
thereof.
e. Responsibilities of Owner and Contractor for:
i) Insurance
ii) Utilities
iii) Operation of mechanical, electrical and other systems
iv) Maintenance and cleaning
v) Security
f. Signatures ofl
i) Architect
ii) Contractor
iii) Owner
3. Owner occupancy ofProject or Designated Portion ofProject:
a. Contractor shall:
i) Obtain certificate ofoccupancy
ii) Perform final cleaning in accordance with article "Cleaning".
b. Owner will occupy project, under provisions in Certificate of Completion.
4. Contractor: Complete work listed for completion or correction, within designated time.
D. Should Architect consider that work is not complete:
l. He shall notiry the Contractor stating the reasons.
2. Contractor: Complete work, and send second written notice to Architect certifying that
designated portion ofProject is complete.
3. Architect and Owner's Representative will reinspect work.
I.13 WARRANTY PERIOD FOR ALLWORK
A. There is a TWO YEAR warranty period from the date of Completion as a minimum. The
warranty period and provisions may be extended in other sections of the Project Manual. The
Contractor agrees to repair and replace all defective work including all labor and materials for
the warranty period. The Contractor agrees to perform the corrective work withinfive (5) days
of receiving notice from the Architect or Owner. Emergency conditions shall require the
Contractor to perform corrective work within two (2) days. The Architect and Owner shall
determine if the corrective work is part of the warranty. Their decision is binding. If the
warranty work is not completed expeditiously as determined by the Owner and Architect, the
Owner reserves the right to have the corrective work completed as well as any professional fees
and the Contractor agrees he is liable for all costs within thirty (30) days of notice. After that
date l.SVo interest per month shall be applied to the cost. The Contractor's bonds shall remain in
effect for the warranty period.
I.I4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Throughout the progress ofconstruction, the Contractor or Subcontractor for each major trade
ARCON I5O9S.2 01 OO OO-5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
category (mechanical, electrical, elevators, etc.) shall keep a current, detailed, record ofall
changes in the installation of his own work from the conditions, locations and layout shown on
the Contract Drawings and/or Shop Drawings. This requirements does not authorize any
deviations without approval of the Owner and Architect.
B. These Record Drawings shall be readily available to the Architect. The drawings, marked to
record all changes made during construction, shall be delivered to him for the Owner upon
completion of the work, All changes shall be marked on drawings and turned over to the
Architect.
C. Suitable prints for record drawings used shall be established by the Contractor at start of
construction. The Contractor shall maintain the prints in good condition and shall use colored
pencils to mark up the prints in a legible manner to show;
l. All significant changes in schedules, plans, sections, elevations and details, such as shifts
in location of walls, doors, windows, stairs and the like made during construction.2. All significant changes in foundations, columns, beams, openings, concrete reinforcing,
lintels, concealed anchorages and knockout panels made during construction.3. Final location ofelectric panels, final arrangement ofelectric circuits and any significant
changes made in electrical design as a result of Change Orders or job conditions.4. Final location and arrangement of all mechanical equipment and major concealed
mechanical work items including, but not limited to, supply and circulating mains, vent
stacks, drainage lines, control and shutoffvalves, dampers, diverters.5' Final location and arrangement of all connections and./or re-routing of existing utilities,
including, but not limited to, sanitary, storm, heating, electric, gas, water andielephone.
Show invert elevations ofsewers and top ofwater lines.6. All the above information shall be transferred to set of drawings in PDF format by the
Contractor. The PDF set shall be provided by the Contractor.
'l . Shop Drawings other than for ductwork will not be acceptable as Project Record
Drawings.
D' When all revisions showing work as finally installed are made, the Record Drawings Set shall be
delivered to the Architect before final payment is made.
1.I5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. The Contractor shall ilrange to instruct Owner's operating personnel in proper operation,
lubrication and maintenance of equipment.
B. The Contractor shall furnish a written, narrative, description of the design and function intended
for all service-connected equipment and systems, including descriptions ofthe normal operation
characteristics and range ofcapabilities, plus single-line diagram when required for clarity.
After approval by the Architect, the Contractor shall bind these in the Maintenance-Operation
Manual.
C. The Contractor shall provide 1 copy of the Maintenance-Operation Manual in PDF format,
reflecting and incorporating the following:
l.
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Shop Drawings as finally approved.
Performance curves for pumps, fans, compressors, and the like.
Description of materials and methods for lubrication
Wiring and control diagrams.
Start-up, operation and shut-down instructions.
Servicing and cleaning instructions.
Preventive maintenance and repair procedures.
Parts lists and source.
ARCON 15095.2 010000‐6GENERAL REQTNREMENTS
D. Each manual shall be include a cover sheet with title and index or table of contents page.
I.16 FINALINSPECTION
A. Contractor shall submit written certification that:
1. Contract documents have been reviewed.
2. Portion of project for which he is responsible has been inspected for compliance with
contract documents.
3' Work has been completed in accordance with confract documents.4- Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Owner's Representative and are
operational.
5. Project is completed and ready for final inspection with all punch list items completed.
B. Architect will make final inspection within ten (10) days after receipt of certification, with
Owner's Representative.
C. Should Architect consider that work is finally complete in accordance with requirements of
contract documents, he will request Contractor to make project closeout submittals.
D. Should Architect consider that work is not finally complete:
l. He shall notifu the Contractor and state reasons.2- Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send second
written notice certifying that work is complete.
3. Architect will reinspect woTk.REINSpECTION COSTS
E. Should Architect be required to perform additional inspections because offailure ofwork to
comply with original certifications of Contractor, Contractor will compensate Architect for
additional services. Contractor shall pay Architect same hourly rate as shown in paragraph 15 of
the Instructions to Bidders in the Project Manual.
I.I7 CLOSEOUTST]BMITTALS
A. Submit the following:
1. Project Record Documents and Record Drawings.
2. Operation and Maintenance Data.
3. Guarantees and Bonds, if specified.
4. Keys and Keying Schedule, if applicable.
5. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials, if specified.
6. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations.
7 . Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities:
a. Certificatesoflnspection:
i) Mechanical and Plumbing equipment.
ii) Electrical equipment.
iii) Fire Protection systems.
b. Contractor shall fumish written certification that materials furnished on project
meet all requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act. They shall also
furnish written certifications that all materials comply with the requirements of the
current NFPA #102 and NFPA #101, Code for Safety to Life from Fire in
Buildings and Structures (Life Safety Code).
ARCON 1s09s.2 0100 00-7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
8. lrtter from each Contractor and Prime Contractor certifying that no asbestos-containing
products were used in this project.
9. Consent of Surety.
10. Balancing Reports.
I l. Warranties.
B. Project Record Drawings, Record Documents, Certifications, and Operation and Maintenance
manuals shall be submitted to Architect in pdf format for review to confirm that all required
documents have been provided by Contractor.
l. Upon review of documents by Architect, Contractor shall submit all Record Drawings,
Record Documents, Certifications, and Operation and Maintenance Manuals to BHFX for
"Interactive Project Closeout". Cost for "Interactive Project Closeout" shall be included
in Contractor's bid.
1.18 FINALDOCUMENT OFACCOI.]NTS
A. Submit final statement of accounting to Architect.
B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments.
1. Original Contract Sum.
2. Additions and deductions resulting from:
a. Previous Change Orders.
b. Cash Allowances.
c. Other adjustments.
d. Deductions for uncorrected work.
e. Deductions for liquidated damages.f. Deductions for Reinspection payments.
3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted.4. Previous payments.
5. Sum remaining due.
C. Architect will prepare final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum not
previously made by Change Orders.
I.19 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A' Contractor shall submit final application in accordance with provisions of General Conditions,
Supplementary General Conditions and as amended by the Instructions to Bidders in the project
Manual.
1,20 FINAL CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT
A' Architect will issue final certificate in accordance with provisions of General Conditions.
1.21 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stat;A in the
Conditions of the Contract.
ARCON 15095。2010000‐8GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as
"directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventionsn and agreements within the construction industry that conlrol
performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor,
or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation,
erection, application, and similar operations.
J. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be
performed by accredited or unionized individuals ofa corresponding generic name, such as
"carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople
of the corresponding generic name.
K. "Experienced": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed
a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with
special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
L. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which
Project is to be built.
1.22 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless
otherwise indicated.
Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality
levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that
are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
l. Minimum Quantity or Quality lrvels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified
ARCON 15095。2010000‐9GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
C.
shan be the mi面 mum provided or perfomed. The actual installatlon may comply exactly
with the血 nimum quantity or quality speciied,orit may exceed the面 面mum within
reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements,indicated numenc values are
nunHnunl or rnaxlmunl,as appropriate,for the context of requlrements. Refer
uncertalnties to Architect for a decision before procceding.
Do Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on ProJect rnust be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perfom a required cOnstruction ac●宙ty,obtain
copics directly fronl publication source and nlake thenl available on request.
E. Indusuγ Orgttizations:Where abbre宙 ations and acronyms are used in SpecincatiOns or other
Contract Documents,they shan mean the recognized nalne ofthe entities indicated in Gale
Researchis"Encyclopedia of Associations・ orin Columbia Books'∥National Trade&
Professional Associations of the l」.S."
F, Symbols:Where symbols are not derlned within Contract Documents,they shall represent items
adopted by the AmeHcan lnstitute of Architects(AIA)and the AmeHcan National Standards
lnsdtute(ANSI).
PART 2 PRODUCTS(NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUT10N(NOT USED)
END OF SEC■ON 01 0000
ARCON 15095。2010000‐10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART
PART 2 PRODUCTS(NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
SECTION 01 23 00
ALTERNATES
GENERAL
RELATED DOCIIMENTS
A. Drawings and general pro宙 sions of the Contract,including General and Supplemene
Conditions and other E)ivision 01 Speciflcation sectiOns,apply to this sectiOn.
SUNIMARY
A. This section includes adninistrative and procedural requirements goveming altemates.
I.O3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain
work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid
amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of
construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation
methods described in the Contract Documents.
B. The cost or credit for each altemate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to
incorporate the alternate into the work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
I.O4 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modi$ or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely and fully
integrate that work into the project
B. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items
incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the
alternate.
Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of this contract.
Schedule: A "Schedule ofAlternates" is included at the end ofthis section. Specification
sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the
work described under each alternate.
1.02
A. ALTERNATE NO. 1: Flooring in Bunk Room
l. Provide the additional cost to remove the existing flooring and provide new flooring
within the bunk room 103 area only, as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
B. ALTERNATE NO. 2: Flooring Work
l. Provide the additional cost to remove the existing flooring and provide new flooring
within Rooms l0l, 104, 107, 108, 109 and I l0 only, as shown on the drawing, *J
ARCON 15095。2012300‐1ALttRNATES
specified herein.
C. ALTERNATE NO.3: Casework
1. Provide the additional cost to provide and install new casework in the bunk room 103.
This includes Units A, B and C and finished wood base units for a complete installation.
END OF SECTION 01 23 OO
ARCON 15095。2012300‐2 ALTERNATES
SECTION 01 33 00
SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
PART l GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
B. Related Sections include the following:
l. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
I.O2 CONFLICTS
A. In the event of any conflict between the provisions hereof and the provisions of the
General and Supplementary Conditions, the more stringent or higher quality requirements
shall apply.
I.O3 ELECTROMCSUBMITTALPROCEDURES
A. The following types of submittals shall be transmitted electronically as outlined in this
section.
l. Shop Drawings
2. Product Data
3. Manufacturer'sinstallationinstructions.
4. Specified product list
B. Electronically transmit each submittal to the Architect as follows:
l. Submittals shall include an electronic letter of transmittal
2. Electronic submittals shall be made only in PDF format.' 3. Electronic submittals shall be reviewed and returned in PDF format
4. Electronic submittal file names shall be easily understood and shall include
relevant numeric reference (e.g. CSI Section Number) and naming conventions.
5. Submitted using ARCON's Newforma website
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
A. Each Contractor shall prepare a schedule of specific target dates for the submission and
return of shop drawings, product data and samples required by the Contract Documents.
The Schedule shall be divided into construction categories. All shop drawings and
product data for interrelated items shall be scheduled for submission at the same time.
The Shop Drawing Submittal Schedule, submitted by the Contractor, shall provide the
Architect with at least 15 calendar days from the date the Architect receives a submittal,
until the date the submittal is required to be mailed back to the Contractor.
B. All shop drawings, product data and samples shall bear the following identification:
SHOP DRAWINGS,SAMPLES,
PRODUCT DATA
ARCON 15095。2013300…1
C.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Date of Submittal.
Submittal Number.
Title of Project.
Name of Contractor and date of his approval.
Name of Subcontractor or supplier and date of submittal to Contractor.
Reference to Specification section and paragraph and/or Drawing Number(s).
The specific location of the work covered.
Any qualification, departure or deviation from the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
Any additional information required by the Specification for the particular
material.
"Shop Drawings" include fabrication, erection, layout and setting drawings;
manufacturers' standard drawings; schedules, descriptive literature, catalogs and
brochures; performance and test data; wiring and control diagrams; all other drawings and
descriptive data pertaining to materials, equipment, piping, duct and conduit systems, and
methods of construction as may be required to show that the materials, equipment or
systems and the position thereof conform to the Contract requirements. Shop Drawings
shall be of sufficient detail to indicate all conflicts with other Subcontractors.
1. NOTE: Reproduction of drawings by any photographic, xerographic or other
similar technique or process, for incorporating the material contained into a shop
drawing, is strictly prohibited.
2. Architect will furnish at Contractor's request CAD Base Drawings for use in
developing shop drawings
a. Contractor shall be required to sign CAD waiver provided by Architect.
b. Contractor shall be charged handling fee of$250 per sheet payable to
Architect.
3. CAD Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCad 2004
only. Drawings shall include only doors, walls, windows, and room numbers.
"Product Data" are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instruction,
brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate a
material, product or system for some portion of the Work.
All material, equipment, etc., indicated on the shop drawings and product data submitted
as furnished by another Subcontractor shall be so stated with the respective
Subcontractor's name or section of work. Under no circumstances will the term "By
Others" be permitted on the shop drawings.
The Contractor shall submit all required shop drawings and product data as received from
each Subcontractor, in accordance with the approved schedules, and in any event, with
such promptness as to cause no delay in his own work.or in that of any other Contractor
or Subcontractor. The Architect shall, within 15 calendar days, or such longer period as
may under the circumstances be reasonable, review shop drawings and product data.
1. Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submiual by architect's
consultants, Owner, or other parties is required allow 21 Calender days for initial
review. Items requiring concurrent review:
a. Doors, frames, and hardware.
b. Elevators.
c. Masonry.
d. Louvers.
e. Mechanical equipment curbs.
SHOP DRAWINGS,SAMPLES,
PRODUCT DATA
D.
E.
F.
ARCON 15095.2 013300‐2
G.
f. Precast Concrete.
g. Architectural items containing electrically operated components
Prior to submission, the Contractor shall thoroughly check all shop drawings and product
data as to measurements, size of members, materials and all other details to satisfy himself
that they conform to the intent of the Drawings and Specifications.
By approving and submitting shop drawings and product data, the Contractor thereby
represents that he has determined and verified all field measurements, construction
criteria, materials, and similar data, and that he has checked and coordinated each shop
drawing with the requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents.
If the shop drawings or product data show variations from Contract requirements because
of standard shop practice or for other reasons, the Contractor shall make specific mention
of such variation in his submittal letter. Any such variations are subject to review by the
Architect.
The Architect shall review shop drawings or product data only for conformance with
design intent of the project. The Architect's review will not be construed as:
L Permitting any departure from the Contract requirements;
2. Relieving the Contractor of the responsibility for any error in details, dimensions
or otherwise that may exist.
3. Accepted departures from additional details or instructions previously furnished
by the Architect, unless the Architect has specifically accepted the variation in
accordance with the thirteenth paragraph of this article.
Subcontractors shall submit to the Architect through the Contractor; four prints ofeach
drawing, including fabrication, erection, layout and setting drawings, and such other
drawings as required under the various sections ofthe Specifications; four copies of
manufacturers'descriptive data for materials, equipment and fixtures, including catalog
sheets, showing dimensions, performance characteristics and capacities, wiring diagrams
and controls, schedules, installation instructions and other pertinent information as
required; all in accordance with the second paragraph ofthis article.
Shop drawings and product data with no corrections will be stamped 'CONFORMS
WITH DESIGN CONCEPT", and those requiring only minor corrections will be stamped
"NOTE MARKINGS". Those stamped "CONFORMS WITH DESIGN CONCEPT" can
be used for ordering, fabrication and erection. Those stamped 'NOTE MARKINGS" can
also be used for ordering, fabrication, and erection, but the original drawings must be
corrected and new transparencies submitted for final acceptance. If drawings resubmitted
for final acceptance have changes other than those previously noted, such changes must
be identified and explained in the letter of transmittal by which the drawings are
submitted.
If major corrections are required, the Architect will return the sepia transparency stamped
"RESUBMIT". The Contractor shall correct the original drawing as required and then
submit new documents to the Architect for approval. The Architect will review the
corrected shop drawing and return sepia transparency to the Contractor until final
approval has been given.
Shop drawings which do not have the Architect's signature and stamp "CONFORMS
WITH DESIGN CONCEPT", or "NOTE MARKINGS" shall not be permitted at the site,
At least one (1) complete set of shop drawings bearing the Architect's stamp shall be kept
at the site, in the Contractor's field office, for reference at all times.
SHOP DRAWINGS,SAMPLES,
PRODUCT DATA
H.
K.
L.
M.
ARCON 15095。2N.
013300‐3
1.05
O. No work in the shop or field shall be started until the Architect has approved the shop
drawings and samples for that segment of the work, nor shall work be done from any shop
drawings not bearing the Architect's stamp of approval.
SAMPLES
A. "Samples" are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship
and establish standards by which the Work will be judged.
B. The Contractor shall submit to Architect, samples of all materials, equipment, fixtures,
appliances and other fittings, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own work
or in that of any other contractor or Subcontractor and in accordance with the approved
schedules. The Architect shall, within l5 calendar days or such longer period as may be
reasonable, check such samples, but only for conformance with the design concept of the
project. The Architect's determination shall be final and binding.
C. Unless otherwise required in the Specifications, three (3) samples of sufficient size to
indicate general visual effect shall be submitted to the Architect. Where samples must
show a range of color, texture, finish, graining, or other similar property, submit three (3)
sets of pairs illustrating the full scope of this range. One set of "CONFORMS WITH
DESIGN CONCEPT" samples shall be retained at the Construction Manager's field
offrce.
D. Samples shall bear the identification specified above in this section.
E. Samples will be accepted by Architect only if all delivery charges are prepaid.
PRODUCTS (Not used)
EXECUTION (Not used)
END OF SEC■ON 01 33 00
SHOP DRAWINGS,SAMPLES,
PRODUCT DATA
PART 2
PART 3
ARCON 15095。2013300‐4
SECTION 02 4t t9
SELECITYE DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Demolition requires the selective removal and subsequent offsite disposal of
the following:
l. Existing flooring as shown
2. Existing partial height partitions, complete.
3. All existing Casework ( loose and Bult-in)
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
2. Division 0l Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction,
protection facilities, and environmental-protection measures for building demolition
operations.
3. Division 01 Section "Selective Demolition" for partial demolition of buildings, structures,
and site improvements.
4. Division 23 Sections for demolishing or relocating site mechanical items.
5. Division 26 Sections for demolishing or relocating site electrical items.
6. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and
below-grade improvements not part of building demolition.
7. Division 33 for demolishing or relocating site utilities.
1,02 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule: Submit schedule indicating proposed methods and sequence ofoperations for
selective demolition work to Architect for review prior to start of work. Include coordination for
shut-off, capping and continuation ofutility services as required, together with details for dust
and noise control protection.
I . Provide a detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure unintemrpted
progress of owner's on-site operations.
2. Coordinate with Owner's continuing occupation of portions of existing building.
I.O3 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Notices: Prior to start of demolition, provide all notices and obtain all permits required by
authorities havingjurisdiction. In the event offailure to provide required notice or permits, pay
penalties assessed, including any penalties assessed against the Owner, the Architect, or other
parties.
B. Occupancy: Owner will be continuously occupying areas of the building immediately adjacent to
areas of selective demolition. Conduct selective demolition in manner that will minimize need
for disruption of Owner's normal operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to
Owner of demolition activities which will severely impact Owner's normal operations.
C. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of structures to be
demolished.
ARCON 15095。2024119‐1SELECTⅣE DE■lEOLITION
l. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by
Owner in so far as practicable. However, variations within structure may occur by
Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition work.
D. Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed, but of salvable value to
Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from
site as they are removed.
l. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.
E. Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms ofprotection required to protect
Owner's personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work.
l. Provide protective measures required to provide free and safe passage of Owner's
personnel and general public to and from occupied portions ofbuilding.
2. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities havingjurisdiction.
3. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement
or collapse of structure or element to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.
4. Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed
during demolition operations.
5. Protect floors with suitable coverings when necessary.
6. Construct temporary insulated solid dustproofpartitions where required to separate areas
where noisy, dirty or dusty operations are performed. Equip partitions with dustproof
doors and security locks if required.
7. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of
existing construction on exterior surfaces, and installation ofnew construction to ensure
that no water,leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas ofexisting building.
8. Remove protections at completion of work.
F. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition operations at no
cost to owner.
G. Traffic: Conduct demolition operations and removal of debris to ensure minimum interference
with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
L Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without
permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide altemate routes around closed or
obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.
H. Flame Cutting: Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable
materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior ofducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices
during fl ame-cutting operations.
I. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, keep in service, and protect
against damage during demolition operations.
l. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when
authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services
during intemrptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities.
2. Maintain sprinkler service at all times during selective demolition.
J. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods
to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply with governing
regulations pertaining to environmental protection.
ARCON 15095。2024119‐2SELECTIVE DEⅣ10LITION
1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice,
flooding, and pollution.
K. Extermination: Employ a certified exterminator and treat areas of building indicated in
accordance with governing health regulations for rodent and insect control.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.OI INSPECTION
A. Prior to commencement of selective demolition work, inspect areas in which work will be
performed. Photograph existing conditions of structure, surfaces, equipment or to surrounding
properties which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from selective demolition. File with
Architect prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement or
collapse of structures to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.
l. Cease operations and notify Architect immediately if safety of structure appears to be
endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for
continuing operations.
B. Cover and protect fumiture, equipment and fixtures to remain from soiling or damage when
demolition work is performed in rooms or areas from which such items have not been removed.
C. Erect and maintain dust-proof partitions and closures required to prevent spread of dust or fumes
to occupied portions of the building.
I . Where selective demolition occurs immediately adjacent to occupied portions of the
building, construct dust-proof partitions of minimum 4 inch studs, 5/8 inch drywall (oints
taped) on occupied side, ll2 inch fire-retardant plywood on demolition side, and fill
partition cavity with sound-deadening insulation.
2. Provide weatherproof closures for exterior openings resulting from demolition work.
D. [,ocate, identify, stub off and disconnect utility services not indicated to remain.
l. Provide by-pass connections necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas
of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shut-down of
service is necessary during change-over.
3.03 DEMOLITION
A. Perform selective demolition in a systematic manner. Use methods required to complete work
indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations.
l. Sawcut and demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry
at junctures with construction to remain using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools;
do not use power-driven impact tools.
2. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and remove materials so as to not
impose excessive loads to supporting walls, floors or framing.
3. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
ARCON 15095.2 02 4119.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
4. For interior slabs on grade, use removal methods that will not crack or structurally disturb
adjacent slabs or partitions. Use power saw where possible.
B. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical or structural elements which conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent ofthe
conflict. Submit report to Architect in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from
Architect, reiurange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overalljob progress
without delay.
3,04 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
protect tlem against damage.
l. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems intemrptions specified in
Division 01.
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap offindicated utility services and mechanicaUelectrical systems
serving areas to be selectively demolished.
l. Contractor shall arrange to shut offindicated services/systems.
2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fre-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and
cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same
or compatible piping material.
c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be remove{ and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
5. Floor slabs may contain pipng or conduit systems. This Contractor is responsible for
taking any measures required to ensure no conduits or other services are damaged. This
includes but is not limited to x-ray or similar non-destructive means.
6. Cut off exterior pipe a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below grade. Cap, valve, or plug
and seal remaining portion ofpipe or conduit after bypassing.
7 . Existing Utilities: Locate, identiff, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities
serving portion(s) of building to be demolished.
8. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished
according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities havingjurisdiction.
3.08 SALVAGE MATERTALS
ARCON 15095。2024119‐4 SELECTⅣE DEMOLIT10N
A. Salvage Items: Where indicated on Drawings as "Salvage-Deliver to Owner", carefully remove
indicated items, clean, store and turn over to Owner and obtain receipt.
l. Historic artifacts, including cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and
tablets, antiques, and other articles ofhistoric significance remain the property ofthe
Owner. Notify Architect if such items are encountered and obtain acceptance regarding
method of removal and salvage for Owner.
3.09 DISPOSALOFDEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Remove debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations from building
site. Transport and legally dispose of materials off site.
l. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with
applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances conceming removal, handling and protection
against exposure or environmental pollution.
2. Burning of removed materials in not be permitted on site.
3.IO CLEAN-UP AND REPAIR
A. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and demolished materials from
site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean.
B. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Retum adjacent areas to condition
existing prior to start of selective demolition work. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces
soiled or damaged by selective demolition work.
END OF SECTION O 4119
ARCON 15095。2024119‐5SELECTⅣE DEⅣ【OLIT10N
SECTION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENRY
PART l GENERAL
l.01 StIMMARY
A. This section includes ale following:
1. Wood blocking and nailers.
2. Wood fundng and sleepers.
3. Plywood backing panels.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
l. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.
2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service.
4. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
I.O3 STIBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in
effect for Project:
l. Power-drivenfasteners.
2. Powder-actuated fasteners.
3. Expansion anchors.
I.O4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.OI WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
ARCON 15095.2 061000‐1ROUGH CARPENTRY
l. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade
compliance issued by grading agency.
3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for
2-inch nominal(38-mm) actual thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber
Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated.
B. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No, 2 grade and any of the following
species:
1. Douglas firlarch; WCLIB or WWPA.
2. Douglas fir-south; WWPA.
3. Douglas firJarch (north);NLGA.
4. Hem-fir; WCLIB orWWPA.
5. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
2,03 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the
following:
1, Blocking.
2. Cants.
3. Nailers.
4. Furring.
5. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide No. 2 grade lumber with 15 percent maximum
moisture content and any of the following species:
1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-frr; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the
following species and grades:
l. Mixed southem pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.
2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north), 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fr,2 Common grade; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB,
orWWPA.
2.04 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS l, Exposure l, C-D Plugged,
fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 112 inch(12.7 mm)
thick.
ARCON 15095。2061000‐2ROUGH CARPENTRY
2.05 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this Article for material and manufacture.
l. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high
relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A I53/A I53M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C954, except with wafer heads
and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sheathing Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing
and recommended by sheathing manufacturer for use with type of sheathing required.
B. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that
is approved for use with type ofconstruction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel
manufacturers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.OI INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, sleepers, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too
small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the International Building Code.
D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as
required.
3.02 WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER ruSTELLEUOTq
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
ARCON 15095。2061000‐3ROUGH CARPENTRY
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces,
unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry
work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement.
3.03 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required
for tolerance offinish work.
B. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level and at ceiling, with wood blocking or
noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.
3,04 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Do not splice structural members between supports.
3.05 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, 'APA
Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and
applications indicated.
l. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above-referenced guide.
2. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated, complying with the following:
a. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
b. Table23O4.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the International Building Code unless
more stringent requirements are indicated on the &awings.
3.06 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE
A. Remove excess material or waste that cannot be used, as described above, and legally dispose of
off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 06 10 OO
ARCC)N15095.2 061000…4ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06 40 00
1NttRIOR ARCH11巴 CttRAL W00DWORK
PART l
l.01
GENERAL
SUMヽ ほY
This section includes the following:
1. Interior Wood Trim
Related Sections include the following:
I . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 0l Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before
woodwork installation.
DEFINI「10NS
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood fu轟 ng,blocking,shims,and hanging strips for
installing woodwork iteins,unless concealed within other construction before woodwOrk
installation.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product I)ata: For each type ofprocess and factory―fabHcated product. hdicate component
mateHals and dimensions and include consmction and application details.
l. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type ofpreservative used, net amount ofpreservative retained, and chemical treatment
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated
material.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material
indicated.
1. Plastic laminates.
D. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program
certificates.
1.04 QUALTTY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
INTERIOR ARCH1lECWRAL
W00DWORKA1.02
1.03
B.
C.
ARCON 15095。2064000‐1
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to
that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility
for production of interior architectural woodwork.
D. Performance shall be in accordance with Custom Grade of the Woodwork Institute "Manual of
Millwork", latest edition.
l. If provisions for the Grade specified are in conflict with, or modified by the drawings
and/or specifications, the modifications shall govern.
E. Contractors and their personnel engaged in the work shall be able to demonstrate successful
experience with work of comparable extent, complexity and quality to that shown and specified.
l. Fabricator shall be a member/licensee in good standing of the Woodwork Institute.
2. Installer shall be a memberflicensee in good standing of the Woodwork Institute.
I.O5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
"Project Conditions" Alticle.
I.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
L Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
I.O7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the WIC quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B. WoodCharacteristics:
IN口 □RIOR ARCHllECWRAL
W00DWORK
ARCON 15095。2064000…2
l. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent for
softwood.
2. Hardwood Plywood: TIPVA HP-l, either veneer core or particle core, unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS l.
4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, M-2-Exterior Glue.
5. Medium-Density Fiberboard: Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade
MD-Exterior Glue.
6. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class I Tempered.
7. Low emitting core:
a. NAUF M-2 Particleboard
i) For casework having recycled content
ii) For casework being manufactwed without the use of urea formaldehyde.
iii) For products having chain of custody certificates certifying that the wood
used in the casework complies with FSC requirements.
b. NAUF Plywood
i) Plywood that meets or exceeds the standards set forth by APA for structural
use panels
ii) For casework being manufactured without the use of urea formaldehyde.
iii) For products having chain ofcustody certif,rcates certifying that the wood
used in the casework complies with FSC requirements.
2.02 INTERIORWOODTRIM
A. Softwood Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): Kiln-dried finished lumber
(S4S) ofone ofthe following species and grades:
1. Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA..
B. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): Clear, kiln-dried, red
oak finished lumber (S4S), plain sawn or sliced.
C. Miscellaneous Exposed Plywood: DOC PS 1, A-D lnterior, thickness as indicated but not less
than 1/2 inch.
2.03 FASTENERS
A. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior
walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead
expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
B. Hardboard Paneling Anchors:
1. Concrete Machine Screw Anchor (Expansion Anchor)
2. G.S.A. Specifications FF-S-325, Group I, Type 1, Class I .
3. #10 x l-112" (min) Round head zinc plated
C. MDF Adhesive
1. Water based latex adhesive, low VOC, cartridge paneling adhesive.
ARCON 15095.2 06 40 OO .3 INTERIOR ARCHITECTI.'RAL
wooDwoRK
PART 3 EXECUT10N
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installation.
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade
specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.
B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of l/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400
mm).
C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged
finish at cuts.
D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork and matching hnal finish if transparent hnish is indicated.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean woodwork on exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or
soiled areas.
END OF SEC■ON 06 40 00
INttRIOR ARCHllECWRAL
W00DWORK
ARCON 15095。2064000‐4
SECTION 09 21 16
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART l GENERAL
l.01 SUMMARY
A・ This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum wallboard.
2. Non-load¨bearing steel iaming.
B. Related S∝tions include the following:
1. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract,including General and Supplementary
Conditions and]Division 01 Sp∝iflcation Sections,apply to dlis Section.
1.02 DEFIM10NS
A. Gypsum Board Teminology:Referto ASTM C ll for deflnitions oftenns for gypsum bOard
assemblies not deflned in this Section or in other referenced standards.
1.03 SUBNIITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.04 QUALITY ASStIRANCE
A. Fire―Test―Response Characterisacs:FoF gypsum board asscmblies with are―resistance ratings,
provide mate五 als and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E l19 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authoHties having
junsdiction.
1. Fire―Resistancc―Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from ULIs"Fire
Resistancc Directory."
B. Sound Transnllssion Characteristics:For gypsum board asse面 blies with STC ratings,provide
mateHals and construction identical to those tested in assembly indcated according to
ASTM E 90 and classifled according to ASTM E 413 by a qualifled independenttesting agency.
1. STC‐Rated Assemblies:Indicated by design designations from GA-600,∥Fire Resistance
Design Manual.∥
1.05 DELIヽ 電RY,STORAGE,AND ttDLING
A. Deliver rnate五 als in o五 ginal packages,containers,or bundles bearing brand name and
identiflcation of rnanufacturer or supplier.
B. Store mateHals inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage llom
weather,direct sunlight,surface contanllnation,corosion,construction trafflc,and other causes.
Stack gypsunl panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requrements or gypsum bOad
manufacturer's wntten recomlnendations,whichever are inore stnngent.
ARCON 15095。2 092116‐l GYPSIIM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.OI MANIUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
L Steel Framing and Furring:
a. Clark Steel Framing Systems.
b. Consolidated Systems, Inc.
c. Dale Industries, Inc. - Dale/Incor.
d. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
e. MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind.
f. National Gypsum Company.
g. Scafco Corporation.
h. Unimast, Inc.
i. Westem Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems.
2. Gypsum Board and Related Products:
a. American Gypsum Co.
b. Certainteed
c. Georgia Pacific Gypsum LLC
d. National Gypsum Company.
e. Trim-tex
f. United States Gypsum Co.
2.02 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING A]VD SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C754for conditions indicated.
B. Tie Wire: ASTM A641lA 641M, Class I zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 inch (1.59 mm)
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 inch ( I .21 mm) diameter wire.
C. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: As follows:
l. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching
hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that
imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a
qualifi ed independent testing agency.
a. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor.
D. Hangers: As follows:
1. Wire Hangers: ASTM A64ll[ 641M, Class I zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 inch
(4.12 mm) diameter.
E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538
inch ( 1.37 mm), a minimum ll2 inch (12.7 mm) wide flange, with manufacturer's standard
corrosion-resistant zinc coating.
l. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: O.OlTginch (0.45 mm)
b. Depth: 3-518 inches
ARCON 15095.2 09 2116-2 GYPST]M BOARD ASSEMBLIES
F, Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C635, direct-hung system composed of
main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
I . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Furring 640 System.
c. USG Interiors, Inc.; Drywall Suspension System.
2.03 STEEL PARTMION AND SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Components, General: As follows:
l. ComplywithASTM CT54forconditions indicated.
B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
l. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch (0.7 mm).
2. Depth: 3-518 inches (92.1 mm)
C. Proprietary Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of
gypsum board applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
l. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Delta Star, Inc., Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; Slotted Track.
c. Dietrich Metal Framing; Slotted SLP-TRK.
D. Proprietary Firestop Track: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and
contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate
depth of studs.
l. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak.
b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.
c. Dietrich Metal Framing; Slotted SLP-TRK.
E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
l. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum l/2
inch(12.7 mm) wide flange.
l. Depth: l-ll2 inches (38.1 mm).
2. Clip Angle: 1-l12by 1-l12inch (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch (l.73mm) thick,
galvanized steel.
G. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with IASTM A 653/A 653M,
hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
ARCON 15095.2 092116.3 GYPSI]M BOARD ASSEMBLIBS
l. HarShaped, Rigid Funing Channels: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm).
b. Depth: 1-ll2 inches (38.1 mm).
2. Steel Studs; ASTM C645.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
b. Depth: 1-518 inches (41.3 mm)
3. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, com:gated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare
steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
4. Tie Wire: ASTM A64llA 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 inch (1.59
mm) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 inch (1.21 mm) diameter wire.
I. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
2.M INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and corresilond with support system indicated.
B. GypsumWallboard: ASTMC36andASMCt396.
l. Type X:
a. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
b. I-ong Edges: Tapered.
c. Incation: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2.05 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
l. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet.
2. Shapes;
a. Comerbead: Use at outside corners.
b- LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed
panel edges.
c. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated.
d. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved
openings.
B. Aluminum or Plastic Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
L Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Fry Reglet Corp.
b. Gordon, Inc.
c. MM Systems Corporation.
d. Pittcon Industries.
ARCON 15095。2092116‐4 GYPSIIM BoARD ASSEⅣIBLIES
e. Trim-tex
2.06 JOINT TREATMENT MATERI.ALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 474.
B. Joint Tape:
l. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper or Fiberglass Tape: Nominal 2 inches wide self
adhering tape
2. Cementitious Backer Units: Alkali-resistant Fiberglass Tape: Nominal 2 inches wide
polymer coated alkali-resistant mesh tape.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats and with gypsum
board type.
l. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat onjoints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
2. Fill Coac For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
3. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by manufacturer.
2.07 AUOLIARYMATERIALS
A. General; Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.1l2 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
D. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls:
l. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, l/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud
size.
E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: See Division 07 Section "Insulation"
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,
cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
ARCON 15095.2 09 2I 16-5 GYPST]M BOARD ASSEMBLIES
corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings
and that hangers will develop their full strength.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devises indicated to other trades for installation in
advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
l. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling
runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed-on fire-resistive materials.
Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building
structure not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary
for installation of gypsum board assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive
material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated.
Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.
3.03 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Installation Standards: ASTM C754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing
installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board
assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories,
furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's
"Gypsum Construction Handbook."
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading
imposed by structural movement.
l. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure
2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor.
3. Install slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and
laterally support assembly.
a. Use deepJeg deflection track where indicated.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members.
Frame both sides ofjoints independently.
3.04 INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay
hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with the location ofhangers required to support standard
ARCON 15095.2 092116…6GYPSllM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards.
Secure wire hangers by looping and wire+ying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Secure rod or angle hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to
deteriorate or otherwise fail.
a. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
b. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.c. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for
panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on
each member and transversely between parallel members.
Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
Wire-tie furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for assemblies
indicated.
E. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacings indicated, but not less than that
required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards.
l. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. unless more stringent spacing is indicated on
drawings.
2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. unless more stringent
spacing is indicated on drawings.
3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless more stringent
spacing is indicated on drawings.
F. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system
meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
3.05 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION A]VD SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board
assemblies abut other construction.
l. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt-felt or foam-gasket
isolation strip between studs and wall.
Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary
not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.
Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended
ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue
framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.
I . Cut studs I 12 inch ( I 3 mm) short of full height to provide perimeter relief.2. For fire-resistance-rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of
4.
B.CD.
B.
C.
ARCON 15095。2092116‐7GYPSIIM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings,
install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and
decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous
from floor to underside of solid structure.
a. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated.
D. Install steel studs and funing at the following spacings:
l. Single-Layer Construction: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.2. Multilayer Construction: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end ofeach panel
can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
F. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable
written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to iamU
anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to
jamb studs.
l. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.2. Extendjamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside offloor or roof
structure above.
G. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless
otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above
door heads.
3.06 APPLYING FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to
avoid abutting endjoints in the central area ofeach ceiling. Stagger abutting endjoints of
adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
D' Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and
ends with not more than l/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not foice into
place.
E. Locate edge and endjoints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind endjoints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at comers of framed openings.
F' Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end ofeach panel is attached to open
(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
G. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
H. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced intemally.
l. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ARCON 15095。2092116‐8GYPSllM BoARD ASSEヽ lBLIES
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in
area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concretejoists, and other structural
members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to
fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4 to 3/8 inch
(6.4 to 9.5 mm) wide joints to install sealant.
I. Isolate perimeter ofnon-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except
floors. Provide 114 to ll2 inch (6.4 to 12.7 mm) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges
with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges
and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints,
and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead ofacoustical sealant. Install acoustical
sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with
ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off
sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions
above acoustical ceilings.
K. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and
finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations.
l. Space screws a maximum of l2 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications.
3.07 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS
A. Single-Layer Application:
L On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before walUpartition board application to the greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in altemate courses
of board.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
B. Multilayer Application on Partitions/lValls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and
face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with baseJayer joints,
unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Staggerjoints on
opposite sides of partitions.
C. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
D. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
E. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate
(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum
board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels
until fastening adhesive has set.
ARCON 15095.2 092116‐9 GYPSuVI BoARD ASSEⅣIBLIES
3.08 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners
used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect.
3.09 FIMSHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill openjoints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Applyjoint tape over gypsum boardjoints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
for tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to
ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:
l. Level 1: Embed tape atjoints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where
indicated, unless a higher level offinish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies
and sound-rated assemblies.
2. I*vel 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to
tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.r0 FrELD QUALTTY CONTROL
A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings, Architect will
conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not
proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have
been corrected.
1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project,
will be ready for above-ceiling observation.
2. Before notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum board
ceilings:
a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation.
b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems.
c. Installation of air-duct systems.
d. Installation ofair devices.
e. Installation ofmechanical system control-air tubing.
f. Installation of ceiling support framing.
END OF SECTION 092116
ARCON 15095。2092116‐10 GYPSllM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
SECT10N 09 50 00
CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
I.O1 SUMMARY
A. Extent of each type acoustical ceiling is indicated on drawings and/or drawing schedules.
B. This Section includes the following:
l. Patching of existing suspended ceiling system.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Drawings and general provision of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 0l Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for site built gypsum board ceilings and
clouds.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A 641: Standard Specification for Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
2. ASTM B22llB22lM: Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Extruded Bars, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
3. ASTM C423: Standard Test for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficient by
the Reverberation Room Method.
4. ASTM C635 : Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of
Metal Suspended Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay in Panel Ceilings.
5. ASTM C636: Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay in Panels.
6. ASTM E1264: Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
7. ASTM 81414: Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation between Rooms
Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for acoustical ceiling unit and suspension
system required.
B. Submit samples of available colors and finish for radial trim. Once trim color has been chosen,
submit l2 inch sample with approved color and finish applied to actual trim profile. Submit
shop drawings indicating layout arrangement, installation layout and details, and manufacturers
data.
I.O4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to project site in original,
unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against
damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination or other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
ARCON 15095.2 09 50 OO.1 CEILINGS
moisfure content.
C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
I.O5 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and
weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
I.O7 EXTRAMATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Fumish extra materials described below matching products
installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.
B. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to2.OVo of each type of
amount installed.
C. Color, textures, and patterns: Provide products to match appearance characteristics indicated or,
ifnot otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors, surface
textures, and pattems available for acoustical ceiling units and exposed metal suspension system
members of quality designated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to those indicated for each designation in the
acoustical panel ceiling schedule at the end ofpart 3.
2.O2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: provide metal suspension systems of type, structural
classification and finish indicated which comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.
B. Metal Suspension System Characteristics: Comply with requirements indicated int the
Acoustical Panel Ceiling Schedule at the end of Part 3.
l. Baked enamel white f,rnish for acoustical panel system. Heads of pop rivets to match
color of grid.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table I, Direct
Hung.
D. Hanger Wire: Galvanized carbon steel wire, ASTM A 641, soft temper, prestretched, Class 1
coating, sized so that stress at 3-times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung),
will be less than yield stress ofwire, but provide not less than 12 gage.
ARCON 15095。2095000‐2CEILINGS
E. Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated,
manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge
details and suspension systems indicted; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as
. that used for exposed flanges of suspension systems runners.
l. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter
required to fit penetrations exactly.
2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal
ofsame depth and width as that formed befween edge ofpanel and flange at exposed
suspension member.
F. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's
extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's
product designations, including splice plates, comer pieces, and attachment and other clips,
complying with the following requirements:
l. Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and hnisher for
type ofuse and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability
properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 22ltB 22Mfor alloy and
temper 6063-T5.
2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.OI PREPARATION
A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for inserts, clips, or other supports required to be installed by
other trades for support ofacoustical ceilings.
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges ofeach ceiling. Avoid use ofless-than-halfwidth panel at borders.
3.02 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. General: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, and to comply
with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements as indicated, and CISCA
standards applicable to work.
B. Install tile with pattern to align with light fixture layout.
C. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C 636, with hangers supported only from
building structural members. Locate hangers not less than 6 inches from each end of spaced 4'-
0" along each carrying channel or direct-hung runner, unless otherwise indicated, leveling to
tolerance of l/8 inch in 12-0".
D. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye-
screws, or other devices which are secure and appropriate for substrate, and which will not
deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures. Do not attach to ductwork, conduit, piping,
or any other mechanicaUelectrical item.
E. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum which are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers
only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal force by bracing,
countersplaying or other equally effective means.
F. Install edge moldings or type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at locations
ARCON 15095。2095000・3 CEILINGS
where necessary to conceal edges ofacoustical panels.
G. Screw-attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inch o.c. and not more than 3 inch
from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12'-0". Miter
corners accurately and connect securely.
H. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
I. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a near,
precise fit.
J. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities havingjurisdiction,
and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommend by panel manufacture's written instructions,
unless otherwise indicated or required.
K. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by
support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at
penetrations.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension
members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish
damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
ARCON 15095。2095000‐4CEILINGS
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING SCHEDULE PANEL TYPE AT1
A. Water-Felted, Mineral-Base Acoustical Panels for Acoustical Panel Ceiling Type ATI:
1. Where this designation is indicated, provide acoustical panels complying with the following:
a. Fine Fissured; Armstrong Industries, Inc.
b. Fine Fissured; Certainteed
c. Radar Climaplus; USG Interiors, Inc.
2. Size:24 by 48 inches (610 by 610 mm).
3. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm).
4. Edge Detail: Square.
5. Classification: Panels fitting ASTM E l2g for Type Itr, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2,
water felted.
6. Paftern: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 pattern designation (description) as specified by product
designation.
7. Color: White.
8. Light Reflectance Coefficient: Not less than LR 0.80.
9. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.55 in compliance with ASTM C423.
10. Ceiling Attenuation Class: Not less than CAC 35 in compliance with ASTM 81414.
I 1. Dimensional Stability: Humidity resistant performance and intercept antimicrobial solution on
front and back.
12. Warranty: Warranty period l0 years after date of substantial completion for acoustical panels and
grid system.
B. Suspension System for this ceiling type:
l. Provide one of the following:
a. Prelude XL; Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. l5l16" Classic Hook; CertainTeed.
c. 1200 System/2ll-2|9 Main Tee; Chicago Metallic Corporation
d. DX/DXL; USG Interiors, Inc.
2. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed
from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolystically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized
according to ASTM A653lA 653M, GOl (2001) coating desigaation, with prefinished 15/16-inch-
(24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges, other characteristics as follows:
a. Structural Classification: Heavy duty system.
b. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type.
c. Face Design: Flush face.
d. Cap Material: Steel sheet.
e. Cap Finish: Painted white.
END OF SECTION 09 50 OO
ARCON 15095.2 095000‐5CEILINGS
SECTION 09`500
RES】LIENT FL00RING
PART l GENERAL
l.01 SUNIMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Rubber floor tile
2. Vinyl Wall Base
3. Resilient Fn01ding accessOries.
B. Related Sections include the fonouttng:
1. Drawings and general provisions of Contract,including(3eneral and Supplementary
Conditions and l)ivision 01 Speciflcation sections,apply to wOrk Of this sectiOn.
2. E)ivision 02 Section``Selective l)emolition"
3. Division 09 Section“Carpet Tile''
1.02 QUALITY ASStIRANCE
A Ma源
,:i贈 IF:ξ 譜露鵬:富 II繊 盤肥:=選 緊:l鮎 聞ll:t路 ∫悧『
1.03 SUBNIIITTALS
A. Product Data:Submit manufacturers techШ cal data for each type of resilient f10oring and
accessory.
B. Samples fOr lnitial Selection Purposes: Subnit rnanufacturer's standard c010r charts in fon■of
actual sections of resilient flooHng,including accesso五 es,showing hll range of c010rs and
pattems available,fbr each type ofresilient floOHng required.
C. Manufacturer's current installation instructions
D.Moisture SuppressiOn Membrane:Manufacturer's warranty registadOn with concrete subf100r
moisture test results and building ambient tt temperature and relative hunlldity test results.
E. Maintenance l)ata: For resilient products to include in nlaintenance manuals.
1.04 PROJECT CONDIT10NS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recOmlnended by lnanufacturer,but notless than 65 deg F
(13 deg C)Or mOre than 95 deg F,in spaces to receive■Oor tile duHng the following dme
peHods:
1. 48 hours before instanation.
2. DuHng installation.
3. 48 hours after instanation.
B. Close spaces to trafrlc du壺 ng floor coveHng installation.
C. Close spaces to trafrlc for 48 hours alter floor coveHng installation.
ARCON 15095。209`500‐1RESILIENT FL00RING
1.05
PART 2
2.01
2.02
D. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have
been completed. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until the latter have been
cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve bond with adhesive as determined by manufacturer's
recommended bond and moisture test.
E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
F. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F ( I 3 deg c) or more than 95 deg F35 deg.
MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Deliver stock of maintenance materials to Owner.
B. Floor Tile: Furnish I box for every 25 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, color run,
and pattern of floor tile installed. Furnish maintenance materials from same manufactured lot as
materials installed and enclosed in protective packaging with identifying labels indicating
building location of each color, texture and clor run..
C. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every
250 linear feet ( I 50 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of
resilient product installed.
PRODUCTS
RESILIENT COLORS AND PATTERNS
A. Provide color and pattems as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards.
RUBBER FLOOR TILE (RT-l)
A. Resilient Rubber Tile Flooring with the following physical characteristics:
l. Complies with requirements for ASTM F 1344 Standard Specification for Rubber Floor
Tile, Class l-A and 1-B.
2' Manufactured from a homogeneous composition of lO\Vo synthetic rubber.3. Overall thickness: l/8".
4. Tile Size: 18"x18" or24"x24"
5. Tile Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's range of options for this
product.
6. ASTM D 2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness: 65
Shore A.
7. ASTM D 3389 Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics Abrasion Resistance: < 1.00
gram weight loss.
8. ASTM D 2047, Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated
Flooring: Exceeds Federal Standards and A.D.A. requirements for slip-resistant.9. ASTM F 970, Standard Test Method for Static l,oad Limit - passes at 250 pSI.
10. ASTM E 989, Standard Classification for Rating Impact Insulation (IIC) using ASTM E
492, Acoustical Measurement of Impact Sound Transmission Through Floor--eiling
Assemblies Using the Tapping Machine - 40 IIC.
I l. ASTM E 648, Standard Test method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems
Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source - equal to or greater than 0.45 waffs/cm2.12. Phthalate, chlorine and halogen-free.
ARCON 15095。2096500‐2RESILIENT FL00RING
B. Available Manufacturers: Provide one of the following:
1. Flexco
2. Johnsonite
3. Nora Systems
4. Roppe
5. Mondo
2,03 VINYLWALLBASE
A. Vinyl Wall Base: Provide vinyl base complying with FS SS-W-40, Type II, with matching end
stops and preformed or molded corner units, and as follows:
l. Height: 4 inch.
2. kngth: 120 foot rolls.
3. Thickness: l/8 inch gage.
4. Style: Standard top-set cove.
5. Finish: Matte.
6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color palette.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
l. Flexco
2. Johnsonite
3. Nora Systems, Inc.
4. Roppe
5. VPI
2.04 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORIES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
l. Flexco
2. Johnsonite
3. Nora Systems, Inc.
4. Roppe
5. VPI
B. Resilient Edge Strips: l/8 inch thick, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or
bullnose edge, color to match flooring, or as selected by Architect from standard colors
available; not less than I inch wide. Install at all changes in floor material.
C. ADA/IAC compliant Glue down vinyl moldings (as below or as indicated on drawings):
l. Transition/Adaptormoldings:
a. For transition between resilient tile and carpet
b. For transition between resilient tile and porcelain, ceramic or other tile
c. For transition between ceramic tile and carpet
d. For transition between carpet and exposed concrete
2. Reducer moldingVEdge guard moldings:
a. For transition between resilient tile and exposed concrete.
b. For transition between ceramic tile and exposed concrete
c. For transition between carpet and exposed concrete.
ARCON 15095.2 09 65 OO.3 RESILIENT FLOORING
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by flooring manufacturer to
suit material and substrate conditions.
B. Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining tlpe as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Installer to inspect subfloor surfaces to determine that they are satisfactory. A satisfactory
subfloor surface is defined as one that is smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges, coatings
preventing adhesive bond, and other defects impairing performance or appearance.
B. Inform the Architect if any of the following conditions are found:
1. Cracks in the subfloor exceed l/4 inch in width.
2. Differential settlement exceeding l/8 inch has occurred across a crack.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Verify internal RH of the concrete according to ASTM F2170.
1. Record readings and submit to moisture suppression membrane manufacturer in
accordance with manufacturer's warranty registration.
2. Do not install if relative humidity levels within the concrete exceed 95Vo.
B. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete subfloors to determine if surfaces are sufficiently
cured and dry as well as to ascertain presence ofcuring compounds.
C. Do not proceed until subfloor surfaces are satisfactory.
D. Prepare subfloor surfaces as follows:
l. Remove coatings from subfloor surfaces that would prevent adhesive bond, including
curing compounds incompatible with resilient flooring adhesives, paint, oils, waxes and
sealers.
2. The floor surface must be sound, solid, clean and free of debris, dust and any other
particles.
3. Use leveling and patching compounds as recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturer.
4. For smoothing in ridges, filling cracks to a smooth finish, and leveling areas up to 1/8
inch thick, or as required to fill joints, etc., provide and install SD-F Feather Finish, as by
ARDEX, Inc., per manufacturer's instructions. This product is trowelable and does not
require a primer, but the floor surface must be sound, solid, clean, and free of debris, dust
and any other particles. This work is to be expected in all rooms and shall be part of the
Base Bid.
5. For any existing flooring depressions over l/8 inch thick, provide and install ARDEX K-
l5 selfJeveling underlayment, or equivalent, as per manufacturer's instructions, after
priming existing floor with ARDEX P-51 primer, diluted l:l with water. Again, the floor
surface must be sound, solid, clean and free ofdebris, dust and any otherparticles. After
installation of the non-trowelable ARDEX K-15, use the SD-F Feather Finish to smooth
any edges which may not feather down to the existing floor.
6. Broom clean and vacuum surfaces to be covered, and inspect subfloor.
7 . Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to
ARCON 15095.2 09 65 OO.4 RESILIENT FLOORING
application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions.
3.03 RESILIENT FLOORING INSTALLATION
GENERAL
l. Install resilient flooring using method indicated in strict compliance with manufacturer's
printed instructions. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and
similar openings.
2. Scribe, cut, and fit resilient flooring to permanent fixtures, builrin furniture and cabinets,
pipes, outlets and permanent columns, walls and partitions.
3. Tightly cement resilient flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising and
puckering atjoints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface
imperfections. Hand roll resilient flooring at perimeter of each covered area to assure
adhesion.
4' Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
that tile at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of
cut widths less than ll2 nle at room perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis, unless
otherwise shown.
5. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as
manufactured and packaged if so numbered. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken,
cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles are not acceptable.6. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as
manufactured and packaged if so numbered. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken,
cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles are not acceptable.
ll.
Lay tile in "checkerboard" fashion with grain reversed in adjacent tiles.
Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in compliance with
flooring manufacturer's directions.
Use only water based adhesives. Do not use solvent based adhesives.
Protect moisture suppression membrane from damage during flooring installation. Do not
tear, rip, puncture, or delaminate membrane when applying trowel on adhesive. Repair
damaged areas according to membrane manufacturer's instructions before flooring
installation. Provide continuous, intact moisture suppression membrane under entire
designated floor area.
Adhere resilient tile directly to moisture suppression membrane using tile manufacturer's
recommended water based adhesive.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORTES
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or
areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed corner
units, or fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond base
to substrate throughout length ofeach piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical
surfaces.
B. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install edging
strips at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed.
C. Fully adhere rubber stair tread units to stair tread substrate throughout length of tread. provide
additional securement at nosing of rubber stair tread unit as required.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
D. Perform following operations immediately upon completion of resilient flooring:
l. Sweep and vacuum floor thoroughly.
ARCON 15095。2096500‐5RESILIENT FL00RING
2. Do not wash floor until time period recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer has
elapsed to allow resilient flooring to become well-sealed in adhesive.3. Damp-mop floor being careful to remove black marks and excessive soil.4. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using appropriate cleaner
recommended by resilient flooring manufacturers.
5. Protect flooring against damage during construction period to comply with resilient
flooring manufacturer's directions.
END OF SECTION 09 65 OO
ARCON 15095。2096500‐6RESILIENT FL00RING
sEcrroN 09 68 10
CARPET TILE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Carpet Tile.
2. Accessories
B. Related Sections include the following:
l. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 0l Specification Sections, apply to this Section.2. Division 07, Section "Surface Applied Vapor Reduction System" for moisture mitigation
system.
3. Division 09 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient wall base and accessories
installed with carpet.
C. ReEntry Specification Scope of Work (Owner requircd recycling of existing carpet)
l. Owner specifies that existing carpet and existing carpet waste be recycled in the best
possible manner. A reclamation plan will be submitted that will provide directions for
the reclamation of recyclable carpet at the job site. "Environmentally friendly" carpet
recycling methods should be performed subsequent to job completion. In this case,
"environmentally friendly" methods consists of either:
a. Recycling is turning waste materials into new materials of the same value, such as
vinyl backing into vinyl backing.
b. Upcycling involves turning waste materials into more valuable products. For
example, using waste PET (plastic from soda bottles) to create Terratex fabric.c. Downcycling creates less valuable products from waste materials. Tuming nylon
face fiber into car parts or carpet padding, including nylon face fiber in recycled
backings, or using carpet for waste-to-energy are good examples ofdowncycling.d. Repurposing allows a product to be reused by an organization or individual.e. Interface assist in facilitating the donation ofused carpeting to charities and other
non-profi t organizations.
I.O2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on all
physical characteristics specified in this section. Include installation recommendations for each
type of substrate required.
B. Preinstallation: Check list prior to installation of carpet.
C. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
l. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet.
2. Existing flooring materials to be removed.
3. Existing flooring materials to remain.
4. Carpet type, color, and dye lot.
ARCON 15095。2096810‐1CARPET TILE
5. Locations where dye lot changes occur.
6. Seamlayout:
a. Seam location, types and methods.
b. Seams run length the length of the area.
c. Main traffic runs long, rather than across, the seam.
d. Incident light does not strike across the seam.
e. Seams are away from areas subject to pivoting traffic.
f. Seams are not perpendicular to doorway openings.
7. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point.
8. Pile direction.
9. Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
10. Type, color, and location ofedge, transition, and other accessory strips.
11. Transition details to other flooring materials.
D. Samples: For each of the following producs and for each color and texture required. Label
each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattem, and designation
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
l. Carpet: 12 inch (300 mm) square Sample.
2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12 inch (300 mm) long Samples.
3. Carpet Seam: 6 inch (150 mm) Sample.
E. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in
schedules.
F. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01.
Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering
Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program
requirements.
B. Flooring contractor shall be responsible for the proper installation including floor preparation.
The carpet installed in accordance with "Installation fo Commercial Carpet" CR1-104.
C. Carpet manufacturer shall provide field service experts to assist in the project startup.
Manufacturer shall notify, in writing, Architect, General Contractor, and Owner if any
installation instructions are not followed.
I.O4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
B. All materials shall be delivered no earlier than 48 hours prior to start of installation.
I.O5 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. General:Comply with CR1 104,Section 6.1,∥Site Conditions;Tcmperature and Hu面 dity."
ARCON 15095。2 ‐ 09`810‐2 cARPET TILE
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
l. Relative humidity 35-55 percent.
2. Ambient air temperature between 65 degrees F. and 75 degrees F.
C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet,
install carpet before installing these items.
I.06 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Ovmer may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of
the Contract Documents.
B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replacq
carpet, at no cost to Owner, that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified
warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual
traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more
than l0 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, delamination, tuft bind, and
moisture penetration.
l. Warranty Period: Lifetime from date of Substantial Completion.
I.O7 EXTRAMATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed
and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Carpet Tiles equal to 5 percent ofamount installed for each type indicated, but not less
than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.OI CARPET TILE (CPT.l)
Carpet material shall be exactly what is shown and described on drawngs.
A. Physical Characteristics:
l. Face Construction: Patterned Loop.
2. Gauge: 5164 inch.
3. Stitches: I 1.3 per inch.
4. Pile Height 0.187 inches for finished carpet per ASTM D 418.
5. Surface Pile Weight: 35.5 oz./sq. yd.
6. Density: Not less than 7,000 (as calculated by face weight x 36 divided by pile).
7. Primary Backing: Fiberglass Reinforced Composite Closed Cell Vinyl Cushion.
8. Secondary Backing: LTP, LIPS, or Unibond.
9. Width: 24" x24" Modular Tile.
ARCON 15095。2096810‐3CARPET TILE
B. Performance Characteristics: As follows:
1. Static Generation: Not more than 3.0 Kv per AATCC-I342. DryBreaking Strength: Notlessthan 100 lbt(445N) perASTM D 2646.3. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC-165.4. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 AFU (AATCC fading units) per
AATCC-I6.
5. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria;
not less than l-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria; no fungal growth; per
AATCC-I74.
6. Flarnmability: Pass DOC-FF-I-70 Pill test and meets NFPA Class I per ASTM E-64g
glue down.
7 - Smoke: Not more than 450 flaming mode per NFPA 258 NBS Smoke chamber.8. Stain Resistance: Meets GSA requirements for AATCC 175.9. Tuft Bind: 20 lbs. average wet or dry per ASTM D-1335.10. Moisture penetration: Lifetime per Dow Modified Spill Test Method E (part 2) and
moisture vapor Transmission Per ASTM 896.
C. AdhesiveSystemCharacteristics:
1. Carpet Securely attached to the floor in compliance with American With Disabilities Act
- Section 4.5.3
2. Product shall be installed in accordance with Standard For Installation of Commercial
Carpet CRl-104.
3. Floor Adhesive: Low VOC, wet set adhesive. Adhesive shall be approved and supplied
by carpet manufacturer.
4. Adhesives shall have lifetime product performance wiuranty.
2.02 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided by or recommended by the following:
l. Carpetmanufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor
conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that
is provided by the following:
1. Carpetmanufacturer.
C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet
manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to
prevent pile loss at seams.
D. Transition Strips: Provide and install "metal edge" transition stip as by Tandus Centiva. This
strip will have to be modified to allow it to follow the curved transition between the carpet tile
and the LVT in the library. Install per manufacturer's instructions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet
performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and
ARCON 15095。2096810‐4CARPET TILE
comply with requirements specifi ed.
l. Usemanufacturer'spreinstallationchecklist.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3,02 PREPARATION
A. Inform the Architect if any of the following conditions are found:
L Cracks in the subfloor exceed ll4 inch in width.
2. Differential settlement exceeding 1/8 inch has occurred across a crack.
B. Verify internal RH of the concrete according to ASTM F2l7O.
l. Record readings and submit to moisture suppression membrane manufacturer in
accordance with manufacturer's warranty registration.
2. Do not install if relative humidity levels within the concrete exced 95Vo.
C. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete subfloors to determine if surfaces are sufficiently
cured and dry as well as to ascertain presence ofcuring compounds.
D. Do not proceed until subfloor surfaces are satisfactory.
E. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive
carpet installation.
F. Subfloor preparation shall meet all conditions as specified in the manufacturer's installation
handbook instructions.
G. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in subsftates. Skim coat the entire existing
floor slab to meet carpet manufacturers requirements.
H. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical
methods recommended in writing by the following:
1. Carpetmanufacturer.
I. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.03 MOISTURE SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install moisture suppression membrane with smooth film side facing concrete slab.
B. Install in accordance with membrane manufacturer's current written installation instructions.
C. If any job site condition interferes with compliance with manufacturer's instructions, contact
manufacturer and obtain written job specific procedures. Notify Architect describing the job site
condition and manufacturer's job specific instructions.
ARCON 15095。2096810‐5CARPET TILE
3.04 INSTALLATION
A, Use only water based adhesives. Do not use solvent based adhesives.
B. Protect moisture suppression membrane from damage during flooring installation. Do not tear,
rip, puncture, or delaminate membrane when applying trowel on adhesive. Repair damaged
areas according to membrane manufacturer's instructions before flooring installation. Provide
continuous, intact moisture suppression membrane under entire designated floor area.
C. Adhere carpet directly to moisture suppression membrane using carpet manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.
D. Direct-Glue-Down Installation; Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down
Installation."
1. Use trowel 1/8" x l/8" x l/16" for adhesive application.
E. Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12,"Carpet on Stairs."
F. Comply with carpet manufacfurer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of
carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under
the door in closed position.
G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.
H. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and builrin furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
I. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
J. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
K. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:
l. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI l(X, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor lnstallations."
C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement ofequipment and
fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09 68 10
ARCON 15095。2096810‐6CARPET TILE
PART l GENERAL
l.01 StIMMARY
A.This Section includes surface preparation and field painting ofthe following:
Exposed interior items and surfaces.
Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
Related Sections include the following:
l. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not
to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item
or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether
or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect
will select from standard colors and finishes available.
l. Painting includes field painting ofexposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including
color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of
mechanical and electrical equipment.
Work under this contract includes but is not necessarily limited to the following:
High pressure washing and abrasive blasting in accordance with the requirements of .
Surface preparation of substrates as required for acceptance ofpainting including
cleaning, small crack repair, patching and making good surfaces and areas to the limits
defined under MPI preparation requirements
Surface preparation and prime painting surfaces for wall coverings prior to installation in
accordance with MPI and wall covering manufacturer's requirements
Specific pre-treatments noted in this section or specified in the MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual.
Priming (except where pre-primed with an approved primer under other sections of work)
and painting of structural steel, miscellaneous metal, ornamental metal and primed steel
equipment.
Priming and back-priming of wood materials as noted in this section or specified in the
MPI architectural Painting Specification Manual.
Painting ofall semi-concealed areas (e.g. inside oflight troughs and valances, behind
grilles, and projecting edges above and below sight lines).
Painting and finishing of all exposed to view elevator equipment and components (i.e.
doors and door frames) unless pre-finished.
Painting ofexposed to view mechanical (heating, ventilating and plumbing) services and
equipment, (e.g. ducts, sprinkler piping, etc.) and electrical work to extent noted on Finish
Schedule unless pre-finished.
Re-painting of existing surfaces and finishes when adjacent to new painting work where
applicable including surface preparation, prime and finish coats in accordance with MPI
Repainting requirements.
Provision of safe and adequate ventilation as required over and above temporary
ventilation supplied by others, where toxic and/or volatile / flammable materials are being
SECTION 09 90 00
PAINTING
B.
C.
D.
7.
10.
ARCON 15095。211.
099000‐1PAINTING
used.
E. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and
labels.
l. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a. Architectural woodwork and casework.
b. Acoustical wall panels.
c. Metal toilet enclosures.
d. Metal lockers.
e. Elevator entrance doors and frames,
f. Elevator equipment.
g. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.h. Light fixtures.
i. Distribution cabinets.
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible
spaces:
a. Foundation spaces.
b. Furred areas.
c. Ceiling plenums.
d. Utility tunnels.
e. Pipe spaces.
f. Duct shafts.
g. Elevator shafts.
3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
c. Chromium plate.
d. Copper.
e. Bronze and brass.
4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
Valve and damper operators.
Linkages.
Sensing devices.
Motor and fan shafts.
5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or
other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or
nomenclature plates.
Related Sections include the following:
l. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
conditions and Division 0l Specification Sections, apply to this Section.2. Division 02 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt paving"
3. Division 02 Section "Portland Cement Concrete paving"
4. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel"5. Division 05 Section "Steel Joists"
6. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications"
F.
ARCON 15095。2099000‐2PAINTING
7. Division 08 Section "Steel Doors and Frames"8. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies"9. Division 09 Section "Wood Gymnasium Flooring"
10. Divisions 23 and26: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions
23 and 26, respectively.
I.O2 REFERENCES
A. The latest edition of the following reference standards shall govern all painting work:
l. Architectural Painting Specification Manual by the Master Painters Institute (MpI)
including identifiers, evaluation, systems, preparation and approved product list.
(Hereafter referred to as MPI Painting Manual) as issued by the local MpI Accredited
Quality Assurance Association having jurisdicition.
2. Test Method for Measuring Total Volatile Organic Compound of Consumer products,
Method 24 (for Surface Coatings) of the Environmental Protection Agency.
I.O3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.
l. Material List:
Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials.
Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and
application.
Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
Finish Schedule of indicating room name, room number, product, manufacturer,
sheen, and associated MPI System
2. Manufacturer's Information:
a. Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and
instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for
use.
3. Certification by the manufacturer that products furnished are in accordance with VOC
Content limits and other requirements of State of Illinois Title 35 (Section 223).
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for each type offinish-coat material indicated.
1. After color selection, the Architect will fumish color chips for surfaces to be coated.
Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate
actual conditions, on representative Samples ofthe actual substrate.
l. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers.
Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required
sheen, color, and texture are achieved.2. Provide a list ofmaterials and applications for each coat ofeach sample. Label each
sample for location and application.
3' Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture
only:
B.
C.
ARCON 15095。2099000‐3PAINTING
a. Painted Wood: Provide two 12 inch (300 mm) square samples of each color and
material on hardboard.
b. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4 by 8 inch (100 by 200 mm) samples of
natural- or stained-wood finish on actual wood surfaces.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses ofarchitects and owners, and other information
specified.
E. Submit a finish schedule of all painting materials indicating room name, room number, product
F. At project completion provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint type and color
coding for all colors used for Owner's later use in maintenance.
G. At project completion provide properly packaged maintenance materials.
I.M QUALITYASSURANCE
A. Contractor shall have a minimum of five years proven satisfactory expserience and shall show
proof before commencement of work that he will maintain a qualified crew of painters
throughout the duration of the work.
B. Qualifiedjourneypersons, as defined by localjurisdiction shall be engaged in painting and
decorating work. Apprentices may be eomployed provided they work under the direct
supervision of a qualified journeyperson in accordance with trade regulations.
C. All materials, preparation and workmanship shall conform to requirements of the latest edition
of the MPI Painting Manual
D. All paint manufacturers and products used shall be as listed under the Approved Product List
section of the MPI Painting Manual.
E. The painting contractor shall receive written confirmation of the specific surface preparation
procedures and primers used for all fabricated steel items from the fabricator/supplier to
ascertain appropriate and manufacturer compatible finish coat materials to be used before
painting any such work.
F. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Conform to the latest edition oflndustrial Health and Safety Regulations issued by
applicable authorities havingjurisdiction in regard to site safety (ladders, scaffolding,
ventilation, etc.)
2. Conform to requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction in regard to the storage,
mixing, application and disposal of all paint and related waste materials.
3. Notify the Paint Inspection Agency on award of contract and make application for
assignment of an Inspector using appropriate forms supplied by the Agency as well as
provide a copy ofthe project painting specification, drawings, color schedule and list of
proposed materials for review purposes prior to commencement of work.
4. Fully cooperate at all times with the requirements of the Paint Inspection Agency in the
performance oftheir duties, including providing access and assistance as required to
complete inspection work.
G. Mock-Ups: When requested by the Architect, provide duplicate 12" square samples of surfaces
or acceptable facsimiles requested painted with specified paint or coating in colors, gloss / sheen
and textures required to MPI Painting Manual standards for review and approval. When
ARCON 15095.2 09 90 OO.4 PAINTING
approved, samples shall become acceptable standard ofquality for appropriate on site surface
with one of each sample retained on site.
I.O5 QUALITYASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting
system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record
of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations; Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating
system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
I.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean
condition, free offoreign materials and residue.
l. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work rueas are protected from
fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
C. Where toxic and/or volatile / explosive / flammable materials are being used, provide adequate
fireproof storage lockers and take all necessary precautions and post adequate warnings (e.g. no
smoking) as required.
D. Take all necessary precautionary and safety measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous
combustion and to protect the environment from hazard spills. Materials that constitute a fire
hazard (paints, solvents, drop clothes, etc.) shall be stored in suitable closed and rated containers
and removed from the site on a daily basis.
E. Waste Management and Disposal:
l. Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, solvents, etc.)
are regarded as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal. Obtain
information on these controls from applicable State and Local government departments
having jurisdiction.
2. All waste materials shall be separated and recycled. Where paint recycling is available,
collect waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility.
Materials that cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of in an
appropriate manner.
3. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive
tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste.
4. To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems
ARCON 15095。2099000…5PAINTING
or into the ground the following procedures shall be strictly adhered to:
a. Retain cleaning water for water based materials to allow sediments to be filtered
out. In no case shall equipment be cleaned using free draining water.
b. Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated
containers and ensure proper disposal.
c. Retum solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant
recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering.
d. Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with
hazardous waste regulations.
e. Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where available).
f. Close and seal tightly partly used cans ofmaterials including sealant and adhesive
containers and store protected in well ventilated fire safe area at moderate
temperature.
C. Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials not required by
the Owner and deliver or zurange collection for verifiable re-use or re-
manufacturing.
I.O7 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 degC).
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C).
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent;
or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
l. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
I.O8 EXTRAMATERIALS
A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the
quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for
storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner.
L Quantity: Furnish the Owner with extra paint materials in the quantities indicated below:
a. Quantity: Fumish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal.
(3.785 L) or I case, as appropriate, ofeach material and color applied.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
l. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore).
2. PPG Architectural Coatings (PPG).
3. Pratt & Lambert (PNL)
4. Sherwin-Williams Co. (SW).
ARCON 15095。2099000‐6PAINTING
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Only materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, etc.) listed in the
latest edition of the MPI Approved Product List (APL) iue acceptable for use on this project.
All such material shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used.
B. Other materials such as linseed oil, shellac, thinners, solvents, etc. shall be the highest quality
product of an MPI listed manufacturer and shall be compatible with paint materials Ueing usiO
as required.
C. All materials used shall be lead and mercury free and shall have low VOC content where
possible.
D. All paint materials shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure free of
blemishes, sags, air entrapment, etc.
E. Where required, paints and coatings shall meet flame spread and smoke developed ratings
designated by local Code requirements and./or authorities having jurisdiction.
2.03 MIXINGANDTINTING
A. Unless otherwise specified herein or pre-approved, all paint shall be ready-mixed and pre-tinted.
Re-mix all paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps,
complete dispersion of settled pigment, and color and gloss uniformity.
l. Tinted primers are not acceptable.
B. Paste, powder or calalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer,s
written instructions.
C. Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do not
use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-based paints.
D' If required, thin paint for spraying according in strict accordance with paint manufacturer,s
instructions. Ifdirections are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from manufacturer
and provide copy of instructions to Architect.
2,M FINISH AND COLORS
A. Unless otherwise specified herein, all painting work shall be in accordance with MpI Custom
Grade finish requirements.
B. Colors shall be as selected by the Consultant from a manufacturer's full range of colors. Refer to
Finish Schedule and drawings for identification and location ofcolors.
C' Interior colors and/or patterns shall be consistent throughout with two (2) separate schemes
prepared.
D. Unless otherwise noted or scheduled, walls shall be painted the same color within a given area.
E. Ceilings (except those having a spray textured coating) shall be painted white.
F. Corridors shall be painted the same color on all floors with two (2) separate color schemes
prepared for doors and trim.
G' Designated rooms / spaces shall be painted using different colors or more than one color than
ARCON 15095.2 099000‐7PAINTING
typical rooms in accordance with Finish Schedule requirements with a minimum of two (2)
colors required.
H. Except as noted herein or indicated on the Finish Schedule, interior walls and ceiling surfaces
shall be painted in accordance with the following criteria over appropriate prime / sealer coat:
l. All areas (except as noted): washable latex with G3 (eggshell) finish.
2. Laundry facilities / rooms, public wash / shower / bathrooms, residential kitchens and
bathrooms: washable latex with G5 (semi-gloss) finish.
3. Public change / wash / shower rooms and institutional facility bathing and shower rooms:
epoxy (tileJike) G5 (semi-gloss) finish for wet surfaces.
4. Public and institutional facility "clean" or "sanitary" areas such as food preparation and
laboratory areas: epoxy (tileJike) G5 (semi-gloss) finish for dry surfaces.
I. Doors shall be painted a different color than door frames and trim with walls a different color
than either. Unless otherwise noted or scheduled all doors, frames and trim shall be painted
using a G5 (semi-gloss) finish.
J. Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, exit and vestibule doors shall be painted a
contrasting color to walls and a different color than any other door in the same area.
K. Access doors, prime coated butts and other prime painted hardware (e.g. door closers), registers,
radiators and covers, exposed piping and electrical panels shall be painted to match adjacent
surfaces (i.e. same color, texture and sheen), unless otherwise noted or where pre-finished.
L. Plywood service panels (e.g. electrical, telephone and cable vision panels) including edges shall
be back-primed and painted to match painted wall mounted on.
M. The inside of light valances shall be painted gloss white.
N. The inside of all duct work behind louvers, grills and diffrrsers for a minimum of 460 mm ( 18")
or beyond sight line, whichever is greater, shall be painted using flat black (non-reflecting) paint,
2.05 GLOSS AND SHEEN RATINGS
A. Gloss / Sheen Ratings:
l. Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating ofapplied paint, in accordance with the
following MPI values:
2. Gloss level ratings of dl painted surfaces shall be as specifled and as noted on Finish
ARCON 15095。2 099000‐ 8 PAINTING
Gloss lrvel Description Units at 60 degrees Units at 85 degrees
Gl Matte or Πat inish O to 5 10 max.
G2 Velvet finish O to 10 10 to 35
G3 Eggshell finish 10 to 25 35H五 n.
G4 Satin flnish 20 to 35
G5 Semi‐Gloss flnish 35 to 70
G6 Gloss flnish 70 to 85
G7 High-Gloss finish >85
Schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Condition of Surfaces:
A. Prior to commencement of work of this section, thoroughly examine (and test as required) all
conditions and surfaces scheduled to be painted and report in writing to the Contractor and
Architect any conditions or surfaces that will adversely affect work ofthis section.
B. No painting work shall corlmence until all such adverse conditions and defects have been
corrected and surfaces and conditions are acceptable to the Painting contractor.
C. Commencement of work shall not be held to imply acceptance of surfaces except as qualified
herein. Such surfaces as concrete, masonry, structural steel and miscellaneous metal, wood,
gypsum board and plaster, shall not be the responsibility ofthe Painting contractor.
D. The Painting contractor shall not be responsible for the condition of the substrate or for
correcting defects and deficiencies in the substrate which may adversely affect the painting work
except for minimal work normally performed by the Painting contractor and as indicated.
Painting Subcontractor shall assure that surfaces are properly prepared before any paint or
coating is applied.
3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. Preparation of Surfaces:
1. Prepare all surfaces in accordance with MPI requirements. Refer to the MPI Painting
Manual in regard to specific requirements for the following:
a. environmental conditions.
b. pH testing.
c. rust stain removal.
d. vertical and horizontal concrete surfaces.
e. clay and concrete masonry units.
f. structural steel and miscellaneous metals.
g. steel exposed to high heat.
h. galvanized and zinc coated metal.
i. dimension and dressed lumber.j. wood decks, floors, stairs and steps.
k. stucco, plaster and gypsum board.
l. canvas and cotton coverings.
2. Sand, clean, dry, etch, neutralize and/or test all surfaces under adequate illumination,
ventilation and temperature requirements.
3. Remove and securely store all miscellaneous hardware and surface fittings / fastenings
(e.g. electrical plates, mechanical louvers, door and window hardware (e.g. hinges, knobs,
locks, trim, frame stops), removable rating / hazard I instruction labels, washroom
accessories, light fixture trim, etc. from wall and ceiling surfaces, doors and frames, prior
to painting. Carefully clean and replace all such items upon completion of painting work
in each area. Do not use solvent or reactive cleaning agents on items that will mar or
remove finishes (e.g. lacquer finishes). Doors shall be removed before painting to paint
bottom and top edges and then re-hung.
4. Protect all adjacent interior surfaces and areas, including rating and instruction labels on
doors, frames, equipment, piping, etc., from painting operations and damage with drop
cloths, shields, masking, templates, or other suitable protective means and make good any
ARCON 15095.2 09 90 OO-9 PAINTING
damage caused by failure to provide such protection.
5. Substrate defects shall be made good and sanded by others ready for painting particularly
after the flust coat ofpaint. Start offinish painting ofdefective surfaces (e.g. gypsum
board) shall indicate acceptance ofsubstrate and any costs ofmaking good defects shall
be borne by the painter including re-painting ofentire defective surface (no touch-up
painting).
6. Confirm preparation and primer used with fabricator of steel items. Refer to Quality
Assurance.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Do not paint unless substrates are acceptable and/or until all environmental conditions (heating,
ventilation, lighting and completion ofother subtrade work) are acceptable for applications of
products.
B. Apply paint or stain in accordance with MPI Painting Manual Premium Grade finish
requirements.
C. Apply paint and decorating material in a workmanlike manner using skilled and trade qualified
applicators as noted under Quality Assurance.
D. Apply paint and coatings within an appropriate time frame after cleaning when environmental
conditions encourage flash-rusting, rusting, contamination or the manufacturer's paint
specifications require earlier applications.
E. Painting coats specified are intended to cover surfaces satisfactorily when applied at proper
consistency and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
F. Tint each coat of paint progressively lighter to enable confirmation of number of coats.
l. Tinted primers are not acceptable.
G. Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, apply a minimum of four coats of paint where deep
or bright colors are used to achieve satisfactory results.
H. Sand and dust between each coat to provide an anchor for next coat and to remove defects
visible from a distance up to 1000 mm (39").
I. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Unless manufacturer's directions
state otherwise, each coat shall be suffrciently dry and hard before a following coat is applied.
J. Prime coat of stain or vamish finishes may be reduced in accordance with manufacturer's
directions.
3,04 INTERIORPAINT AND COATING SYSTEMS
A. Paint interior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Manual requirements:
l. Concrete Vertical Surfaces (including horizontal soffits):
a. INT 3.lA (MPI 52): Latex G3 finish (over primer).
b. Basis-of-Design Product: ProMar 200 Tnro VOC Interior Latex
2. Concrete Horizontal Surfaces (floors and stairs):
a. INT 3.2G (MPI 127): Concrete floor sealer, water based hnish.
ARCON 15095.2 09 90 OO.IO PAINTING
b. Basis-of-Design Product: SW ArmorSeal Tread-Plex
3. Clay Masonry Units (pressed and extruded brick and only where indicated on room finish
schedule):
a. INT 4.1A (MPI 144): Latex G3 finish.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: ProMar 200 7*ro VOC Interior Latex
4. Concrete Masonry Units (does not include ground and split face block and brick):
a. INT 4.2A (MPI 52): Latex finish over block filler - G3 finish.
b. The application of water repellent or clear finishes shall be done by others per
Division 04 Section'Masonry Assemblies"
c. Basis-of-Design Product ProMar 2N 7*ro VOC Interior Latex
5. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications (beams, joists, and deck):
a. INT 5.lC (lvIPI226): Water based dry fall finish - G5 finish.
b. Basis-of-Design Product SW Pro Industrial Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall
6. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications (columns, beams, joists, etc.):
a. INT 5.lQ (MPI l4l): Pre catalyzed acrylic epoxy - G5 finish
b. Basis-of-Design Product: Pro Industrial Pre-catalyzed Waterbased Expoxy
7. Galvanized Metal (doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, overhead decking, ducts,
etc.):
a. INT 5.3A (MPI 14l): Pre-catalyzed acrylic epoxy - G5 frnish.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: Pro Industrial Pre-catalyzed Waterbased Expoxy
8. Stained Dimension Lumber (columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking, etc.):
a. INT 6.2J (MPI 57): Varnish Interior, Polyurethane, Oil Modified over stain - G4
finish.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: SW-Minwax Wood Classics Polyurethane Varnish
9. Stained Dressed Lumber (window frames, casings, moldings, and running trim);
a. INT 6.38 (MPI 129): Water based clear polyurethane varnish over stain - G5
finish.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: SW-Minwax Water Based Polyurethane Vamish
10. Painted Dimension Lumber (columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking, etc.):
a. INT 6.2D: Latex G3 finish (over latex primer).
b. Basis-of-Design Product: SW Pro industrial Acrylic 866-660 series
I l. Painted Dressed Lumber (window frames, casings, moldings and running trim):
a. INT 6.3A: High performance architectural latex - G5 finish
b. Basis-of-Design Product: SW Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss 866 series
12. Plaster and Gypsum Board (gypsum wallboard, drywall, "sheet rock type material", etc.,
and textured finishes) :
ARCON 15095。2099000‐11 PAINTING
a. INT 9.2A (MPI 144): Latex G3 finish.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: SW Pro Mar 200 ZeroYOC Interior Latex
13. Painting of interior game line layouts with colors as noted on approved game line layout
drawing on gymnasium flooring to be by others.
3.05 MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND RELATED SURFACES
A. Unless otherwise specified or noted, paint all 'hnfinished" conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork
and other mechanical and electrical equipment with color and texture to match adjacent surfaces,
in the following areas:
L Where exposed-to-view in all exterior and interior areas.
2. In all interior high humidity interior areas.
3. tn all boiler room, mechanical and electrical rooms.
B. In unfinished areas leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and
electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks.
C. Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as supplied
by manufacturer of equipment.
D. Do not paint over nameplates.
E. Paint the inside of all ductwork where visible behind louvers, grilles and diffrrsers for a
minimum of 460 mm ( 1 8") or beyond sight line, whichever is greater, with primer and one coat
of matt black (non-reflecting) paint.
F. Paint the inside of light valances gloss white.
G. Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel.
H. Paint red or band all fire protection piping and sprinkler lines in accordance with mechanical
specification requirements. Keep sprinkler heads free of paint.
I. Paint yellow or band all natural gas piping in accordance with mechanical specification
requirements.
J. Backprime and paint face and edges of plywood service panels for telephone and electrical
equipment before installation to match adjacent wall surface. Leave equipment in original finish
except for touch-up as required, and paint conduits, mounting accessories and other unfinished
items.
K. Paint exterior steel electrical light standards. Do not paint outdoor transformers and substation
equipment.
3.06 FrELD QUALITY CONTROL AND CONDTTTONS OF ACCEPTANCE
A. Al surfaces, preparation and paint applications shall be inspected.
B. Painted exterior and interior surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness ifany
of the following defects are apparent to the Owner or Architect:
1. Brush / roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or shadowing
by inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, and foreign materials in paint
coatings.
ARCON 15095.2 09 90 00.12 PAINTING
2. Evidence ofpoor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices, pockets,
corners and re-entrant angles.
3. Damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other contributory cause.4. Damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection from the
weather.
5. Damage and/or contamination of paint due to blown contaminants (dust, spray paint, etc.).
C. Painted surfaces shall be considered unacceptable ifany ofthe following are evident under
natural lighting source for exterior surfaces and final lighting source (including daylight) for
interior surfaces:
1. Visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles
from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39").
2. Visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles
from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39").
3. Visible defects are evident on ceiling, soffit and other overhead surfaces when viewed at
normal viewing angles.
4. When the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of color, sheen, texture,
and hiding across full surface area.
D. Painted surfaces rejected by the inspector shall be made good at the expense ofthe Contractor.
Small affected areas rnay be touched up; Iarge affected areas or areas without sufficient dry film
thickness ofpaint shall be repainted. Runs, sags ofdamaged paint shall be removed by scraper
or by sanding prior to application of paint.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect all exterior surfaces and areas, including landscaping, walks, drives, all adjacent building
surfaces (including glass, aluminum surfaces, etc.) and equipment and any labels and signage
from painting operations and damage by drop cloths, shields, masking, templates, or other
suitable protective means and make good any damage caused by failure to provide such
protection.
B. Protect all interior surfaces and areas, including glass, aluminum surfaces, etc. and equipment
and any labels and signage from painting operations and damage by drop cloths, shields,
masking, templates, or other suitable protective means and make good any damage caused by
failure to provide such protection.
C. Erect barriers or screens and post signs to wam of or limit or direct traffic away or around work
area as required.
3.08 CLEAN UP
A. Remove all paint where spilled, splashed, splattered or sprayed as work progresses using means
and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces.
B. Keep work area free from an unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials
and debris.
C. Remove combustible rubbish materials and empty paint cans each day and safely dispose of
same in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Clean equipment and dispose of wash water / solvents as well as all other cleaning and
protective materials (e.g. rags, drop cloths, masking papers, etc.), paints, thinners, paint
removers / strippers in accordance with the safety requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
ARCON 15095.2 09 90 OO-13 PAINTING
3.09 TOUCH UPPA恥 町ING OF EXISTING Π NISHES
A. Refer to MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual for repainting of e対 sting flnishes.
B. Use flnish coat ofrespective new surface paint system for nllnor repair of existing Flnishes. Use
system p五 mer where existing flnishes are dalnaged down to bare surface.
END OF SEC■ON 09 90 00
ARCON 15095。2099000‐ 14 PAINTING
SECTION 260010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERALCONDITIONS
A. The General Conditions of the Contract for the Construction of Buildings, Standard Form of the
American Institut€ of Architects current edition, The Supplementary General Conditions and the
Mechanical and Electrical Special Conditions are apart of these specifications.
I.O2 WORKINCLUDED
A. Basic Electrical Requirements are specifically applicable to Divisions 26,27 & 28.
B. This specification and accompanying plans cover and shall govern the installation of a complete electrical
system, all as specifically set forth herein, and as indicated in the plans.
C. The drawings and these specifications are complementary each to the other, and what is called for by one
shall be as binding as ifcalled for by both. They are intended to include everything requisite and
necessary to the entire finishing ofthe work notwithstanding that every item necessarily required by such
work is not especially mentioned or shown.
D. This Contractor shall furnish all labor and material necessary for the complete system and items of work
including (but not limited to):
l. All work complaint with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and the National Fire
Alarm and Signaling Code
2. All work complaint with Illinois Administrative Code (IAC) 180 and all building codes as listed in
IAC Section 180.60
3. All electrical service equipment for the building as indicated on the plans and as herein specified
and/or as required by the Service Companies for general and emergency lighting, and power.
4. Equipment wiring
5. Wiring Devices
6. Stnrctured Telecommunications Cabling and Enclosures
7. All branch circuit wiring
8. Furnish, install and connect all conduit, fittings, outlet boxes and junction boxes, complete with
wiring as required for complete systems.
9. Furnish, install and connect all switches, receptacles and miscellaneous electrical equipment as
required and as shown on the plans and as hereinafter specified.
E. Contractor will distinctly understand that the work described herein is to be a finished job, and the whole
completed in a workmanlike manner. The omission from either the drawings or specifications of minor
details which ordinarily form a part offirst class work ofthis character and are necessary to the
completion ofthis project as contemplated and described, shall not be a cause for any extra cost, but shall
be included by this Contractor as if specifically mentioned or shown.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Materials, equipment and installation thereof shall conform to the latest editions of the following:
l. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
2. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials
3. CBM - Certified Ballast Manufactueres
4. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories
5. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
6. NBS - National Bureau of Standards
7. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
8. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
9. OSHA - Occupation Safety and Health Act.
10. UL - Underwriters Laboratores
I l. BOCA - Building Officials & Code Administrators International, Inc.
12. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
ARCON 15095 260010‐l BASIC ELECTR!CAL REQUIREMENTS
13. IAC 180 - Illinois Administrative Code 180
14. All materials, equipment, and installation thereof shall conform to the standards of the National
Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and of the Underwriters' Laboratories (LIL)
B. Notifr the Architect/Engineer of any materials or apparatus believed to be inadequate, unsuitable, in
violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. In every installation where regulations of electric utility and telephone companies apply, conformance
with their regulations is mandatory and any costs involved shall be included in the Contract, with the
exception of extra facility and other charges which are directly paid by the Owner. or as otherwise
instructed herein.
I.O4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions as described within the general requirements section.
B. Proposed Products List: Include Products specified in each Division 26,27 & 28 Section:
C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems,
products and accessories in a single submittal.
D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.
E. Contractor shall review all shop drawings prior to submitting them for Architect/Engineer's review.
Contractor shall stamp each shop drawing to certi$ that he has reviewed it. Engineer will not check any
drawings that Contractor has not stamped with his review certification.
F. Owner's representative shall review all materials, equipment, fixtures, motor control centers, panelboards,
control panels, etc., and other appurtenances provided for this work before proceeding with the purchase
and installation.
G. All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings and other data
necessary for the Owner's Representative to ascertain that the proposed equipment/fixtures and materials
comply with specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall be legible and clearly
identiS equipment/fixtures being submitted.
H. Submittals for individual system and equipment assemblies which consist of more than one item or
component shall be made for the system as a whole. Where necessary, submit plans of the system
drawing on sheet sizes same as the contract drawings. Panial submittals will not be considered for
approval.
I. Owner's Representative review of shop drawings will be rendered as a service only and shall not be
considered as a guarantee ofmeasurements or ofbuilding conditions, nor shall it be construed as relieving
the Contractor of basic responsibilities under his conhact.
J. Ifthe shop drawings show variations from contract requirements because ofshop practice or other
reasons, Contractor shall make specific reference to such variation in his letter of transmittal in order that,
of acceptable, suitable action may be taken for proper adjustment; otherwise Contractor will not be
relieved of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with contract documents even though
such shop drawings have been reviewed.
K. All shop drawings shall be submitted to permit Owner's Representative ample time to review before
material is released for delivery to job.
L. Contractor shall maintain a permanent file of shop drawings to turn over to Owner's Representative at
completion of project.
M. Submitals shall include 1/4" = l'-0" dimensioned drawings of all electrical equipment rooms for review
before installation continues.
N. Coordination and Record Drawings:
l. In addition to the preparation and submittal of shop drawings and product data for manufactured
electrical equipment and materials, prepar€ and maintain in current stafus, a complete set of
detailed, completely circuited, and dimensioned electrical record drawings for electrical work
included under the Contract.
ARCON 15095 260010‐2BASIC ELECTR:CAL REQUIREMENTS
0.
P.
2. In addition to the floor and ceiling plans, layouts ofall functionally critical areas and congested
areas, such as mechanical and electrical equipment rooms. shall be drawn at a minimum scale of
1/4" equals l'-0" with all details of construction shown.
3. Record drawings shall be made under the direction and supervision of the Contractor and shall
show all electrical work inclusive of conduit, wiring, electrical equipment and devices, Iighting
fixfure locations and elevations, points where conduit enters or leaves strucfural slabs and walls,
junction boxes, conduit supports and inserts. The complete electrical distribution system from
source or sources up to and including each branch circuit panelboard shall be shown and
dimensioned exactly as installed, with all feeders located on plan. Major equipment and apparatus
shall be shown to scale and properly located. Drawings shall also show locations and depths of
underground conduits and ducts and their terminations, as installed.
4. Coordination drawings shall be made on 3 mil mylar sheets or CAD drawing compatible with
AutoCAD Version 14.0 of the same size and with the same border lines and title blocks as the
Architect/Engineer's Drawings, with the Contractor's name added.
5. Coordinate electrical work with the work of other trades and in preparing the record drawings,
check the work of other trades in order to avoid possible installation conflicts arising therefrom. In
the event of conflicts of interferences that cannot be resolved in the field, request a written
clarifi cation from the Architect/Engineer.
6. Record drawings shall indicate the electrical installation exactly as constructed and shall be
periodically revised to reflect all changes, including those required by the Architect/Engineer, those
which are or have been found necessary in the field and those which may be suggested by the
Contractor and accepted by the ArchitectlEngineer. Drawings shall be revised when considered
necessary the the Architect/Engineer or the Contractor in order to facilitate proper coordination.
7. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, the drawings are in acceptable condition after each has
been finally revised, they may be submitted as the field record drawings.
Equipment Drawings:
1 . Provide complete set of shop drawings bound in permanent binder.
2. Provide typewritten list of each type, quantity and manufacturer of lamp installed.
3. Provide typewritten list of each type, quantity, size and manufacturer of fuse, motor overload
heater, etc., installed.
4. Provide a complete list of all replaceable components for maintenance purposes.
Maintenance and Operating Manuals
1. Maintenance and Operation Manual, submit as required for systems and equipment specified in the
technical sections. Furnish five (5) copies, bound in hardback binders, manufacturer's standard
binders or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete manual as specified in the technical
section, but in no case later than prior to performance of systems or equipment test, and fumish the
remaining manuals prior to contract completion.
2. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the works "MAINTENANCE AND
OPERATION MANUAL", the name and location of the system, equipment, building, name of
Contractor and contract number. Include in the manual the names, addresses and telephone
numbers ofeach subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local representatives for
the system or equipment.
3. Provide a "Table of Contents" and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents, with tab
sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be legible and easily
read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.
4. The manual shall include:
a. Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed
operation and control ofthe equipment.
b. A control sequence describing start-up, operation and shutdown.
c. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.
d. Installation and maintenance instructions.
e. Safety precautions.
f. Diagrams and illustrations.
ARCON 15095 260010‐ 3 BAS:C ELECTR:CAL REQUIREMENTS
g. Testing methods.
h. Performance data.
i. Lubrication schedule including type, grade, temperature range and frequency.j. Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of
special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended spare
parts and name of servicing organization.
k. Appendix; list qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the equipment,
including addresses and certified qualifications.
a. PoSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
l. Furnish approved operating instructions for systems and equipment indicated in the technical
sections for use by operation personnel. The operating instructions shall include wiring diagrams,
control diagrams and controls sequence for each principal system and equipment. Print or engrave
operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions
were directed. Attach or post operating instructions adjacent to each principal system and
equipment including start-up, operating, shutdown, safety precautions and procedure in the event of
equipment failure. Provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures for operating
instructions exposed to the weather. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight
and shall be secured to prevent easy removal.
1.05 REGULATORYREQUIREMENTS
A. The work shall be performed in accordance with codes, laws, and ordinances of Federal, State and local
governing bodies having jurisdiction.
B. In case ofdifferences between building codes, Federal and State laws, local ordinaces and utility
company regulations and the Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern.
C. Fire Alarm: Conform to the latest edition ofNFPA 72 (National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code)
D. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60
E. Obtain permits and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction.
F. Obtain approvals, where required, from inspection authorities for exit, emergency lighting, fire alarm
device locationso and other electrical installations requiring specific approval. Prints ofthe Electrical
Drawings, for this purpose, will be furnished by the Architect on request. Required wiring diagrams shall
be provided and submitted for approval by the Conhactor. Copies ofthe final approved drawings shall
be delivered to the Architect. Approvals shall be obtained before commencement of related work.
G. Pay all fees, and other charges incident to electrical work and obtain and pay for required insurance,
permits, licenses, and inspections. Arrange for all required inspections and deliver certificates and
approval for same to the Architect, as a requirement for final payment.
1.06 PROJECT/SITECONDITIONS
A. The drawings fumished in the bid set are to give the general intent of the mechanical and electrical
requirements. All information for installation is not shown and is not fully coordinated with Architectural
and Mechanical drawing and specifications. They are not intended as final installation drawings,
although they may be used as a guide if the Contractor feels that sufficient information for installation is
shown. Installation must be fully coordinated with all trades. If it is necessary to clarifu or provide more
detail than is shown, this Contractor shall prepare drawings and submit the same for review and comment.
B. Carefully examine the contract documents, visit the site, and thoroughly become familiar with the local
conditions relating to the work. Failure to do so will not relieve the contractor of the Contract.
C. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.
D. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project Conditions, including
changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
1.07 CoNTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY EQUIPMENT DIMENSIONS
A. Before ordering any materials or proceeding with the work, this Contractor shall verifu all measurements
at the site and be responsible for correctness of same. No extra compensation will be allowed because of
ARCON 15095 260010‐4BASIC ELECTR!CAL REQUIREMENttS
difference between the actual measurements and dimensions indicated on the drawings. Any difference
which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect's Superintendent on the job for rectification
before proceeding with the work.
B. Contractor and/or manufacturer shall verify that the capacity and duty specified meets the characteristics
of the equipment he submits for review.
C. If equipment is submitted for review and does not meet the physical size or arrangement of what was
scheduled and specified, Contractor shall pay for all alternations required to accommodate such
equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor shall also pay all costs for additional work
required by other Contractors, Owner, Architect or Engineer to make changes wtrich would allow the
equipment to fit the space.
1.08 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIF"T EXISTING CONDITIONS AND OPENINGS
A. Contractor shall field verifo the size of existing openings, windows, doors, corridors, rooms, etc. for
access of the new equipment into the existing building. If openings are too small for access, then
Contractor shall provide new or enlarged openings, at his own expense, to facilitate entrance into existing
space or building. Contractor may elect to order the equipment disassembled and/or with split housing
for entrance into the existing space or building. Contractor shall reassemble equipment after it is in the
space at his own expense.
1,09 OCCUPANCY ADJUSTMENTS
A. Provide on-site assistance in testing and verification of systems for this project to meet occupancy
conditions.
B. Provide up to three on-site assistance visits within one year of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Proposal shall be based upon the furnishing of all materials and equipment as specified, which in every
case shall be new and, where not specifically referred to by manufacturer's name, ofthe best grade and
quality available.
B. Materials used through this installation shall be new (without blemish or defect) and the best of their
respective kind and the same shall be installed in a neat, accurate, and workmanlike mannbr, and in a
manner to permit the work of other trades to also be installed wherever the work covered by this
specification meets with, or must be considered, in connection with the work of other trades working on
this installation. Equipment shall not be used for temporary light and power purposes, including lamps.
This workmanship and these materials must be executed and fumished in a manner entirely satisfactory to
the Owner's Representative.
C. Items of equipment of within a specificy category type (such as fuses, conduit, electrical distribution
equipment [distribution switchboards, panelboards, motor starters, enclosed switches] wiring systems),
shall be the product ofone manufacturer throughout, unless otherwise indicated or accepted by the
Architect/Engineer.
D. Where two types of similar equipment are specified or shown on the drawings, the Base Bid will be based
on the higher quality or greater number. All work shown on the drawings & specifications will be
adjusted to comply with all sections of the Local Codes.
E. Wherever in the specifications, a particular article or material is definitely mentioned, it shall be provided
and no substitutions shall be allowed, especially insofar as the submittal of the base bid is concerned.
Should this Contractor desire to substitute other materials for those specified, he may submit these
substitutions in the form of voluntary altemates to the base bid, designating appropriate additions or
deductions for each alternate. Should no alternates be submitted, the contract shall be entered into on the
basis of the specified base bid equipment. Final review of equipment shall be by the Owner
Representative. Voluntary alternates will only be recognized at the time of bid.
F. A specification item followed by one (l) or more manufacturers; names of other manufacturers may be
submitted for review to the Owner's Representative a minimum of seven (7) days prior to receiving bids.
Acceptance will be granted only ifissued by addendum (no exceptions).
ARCON 15095 260010‐ 5 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
G. A specification item followed by one (l) or more manufacturers and "or equal" is open to all equal
products or materials. However, Contractor shall supply one (1) of the listed manufacturers at no
additional cost if Owner's Representative determines substituted product unsatisfactory.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Receive, handle, and store electrical items and materials at the project site. Materials and electrical items
shall be so placed that they are protected from damage and deterioration. Damaged or othjerwise
unsuitable materials and electrical items shall be immediately removed from the site.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. The Drawings for work under Divisions 26,27 & 28 are diagrammatic and are intended to convey the
scope ofwork and indicate the general arrangement ofconduit, boxes, equipment, devices, fixfures and
other work included in the Contract.
B. Location of items required by the Drawings or specifications not fixed by dimensions are approximate
only and exact locations necessary to secure the best conditions and results shall be determined at the site
and shall be subject to the approval ofthe Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for
exact/final location and coordination of all devices and in case any devices are not installed in correct
location, Contractor shall move same including all necessary cutting and patching at Contractor's
expense.
C. Owner reserves right to change position of anylall devices or fixtures vrithin l0'-0' radius before work is
installed without extra charge.
D. Check with Heating Contractor as to location of radiation, Ventilation Contractor as to location of ducts
and grilles, and Plumbing Contractor as to location of piping before installing the work.
E. Contractor shall consult with the Architect and review the plans to verift the exact locations of all outlets
and mounting heights to insure that all outlets are above counters where cabinet work and/or fumiture
occurs and switches are at the correct side ofdoor swings.
F. This Contractor shall consult with the Equipment Suppliers for the correct sizes of all outlets in sufficient
time before wall construction.
G. Follow drawings in layout out work, check drawings of other trades to veri! spaces in which work will
be installed, and maintain maximum headroom and space conditions at all points.
H. Where headroom or spaae conditions appear inadequate, the Architect/Engineer shall be notified before
proceeding with installation.
I. Minor conduit rerouting and changes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
J. Whenever it becomes necessary for the complete fulfillment of this specification to furnish labor or
materials, other than that which is generally accepted by trade agreement or general practice to belong to
his particular trade or branch of work, he shall sublet such work or shall employ workmen regularly
employed, to the end that there will be no delay or stoppage of work due to infringement or alleged
infringement of trade agreements as to jurisdiction.
K. Perform all work with skilled mechanics of the particular trade involved in a neat and workmanlike
manner.
L. Furnish other trades advance information on locations and sizes of frames, boxes, sleeves and openings
needed for the work, and also fumish information and shop drawings necessary to permit trades affected
to install their work properly and without delay.
M. Where there is evidence that work of one trade will interfere with the work of other trades, all trades shall
assist in working out space allocations to make satisfactory adjustments and shall be prepared to submit
and revise coordinate shop drawings.
N. With the approval ofthe Architect/Engineer and without additional cost to the Owner, make minor
modifications in the work as required by structural interferences, by interferences with work of other
trades or for proper execution ofthe work.
ARCON 15095 260010‐6 BAS!C ELECTR:CAL REQUIREMENTS
O. Work installed before coordinating with other trades so as to cause interference with the work of such
other trades shall be changed to correct such condition without additional cost to the Owner and as
directed by the Architect/Engineer.
P. Equipment shall be installed with adequate space allowed for removal, repair or changes to equipment.
Ready accessibility to removable parts of equipment and to wiring shall be provided without moving
other equipment which is to be installed or which is in place. Electrical Contractor shall verifr
measurements. Discrepancies shall be brought to the Architect/Engineer's attention for interpretation.
a. Determine temporary openings in the buildings that will be required for the admission of apparatus
furnished under this Division, and notify the ArchitectlEngineer accordingly. In the event of failure to
give sufficient notice in time to arrange for these openings during construction, assume all costs of
providing such openings thereafter.
R. Location of electrical outlets, lighting panels, cabinets, equipment, etc. is approximate and exact locations
shall be determined at the project.
S. Electrical Contractor shall refer to contract documents for details, reflected ceiling plans, and large scale
drawings.
T. Equipment shall be installed with ample space allowed for its removal for repairs or changes. Ready
accessibility to removable parts of equipment and to wiring shall be provided so that other equipment, in
place or to be installed, need not be moved at any time.
U. Sufficient access for the installafion of electrical equipment shall be determined prior to delivery.
V. Compare all contract drawings and specifications to determine the intent of the two together. In case of
any discrepancy between the drawings and specifications, the matter shall be referred to the Owner's
Representative before any work is installed. The interpretation of the intent shall rest solely with the
Owner's Representative, and his decision shall be considered final.
W. Any changes of the electrical layout necessary to make the work conform to the entire facility as
construction, fit the work of other trades or conform to the rules of the city and state and/or other
regulating bodies (Public Health, NFPA, etc.), shall be made without additional cost.
X. Omission in the contract drawings and/or specifications of any items necessary for the proper completion
or operation of the work outlined in this specification shall not relieve the Contractor fiom furnishing
same without additional cost.
Y. WORK BY OTI{ERS
l. Except as otherwise noted or specified, this Contractor shall not include the following apparatus
which shall be provided under other contracts: Electric motors will be set on foundation by others,
but shall be wired by this Contractor.
2. All apparatus fumished by others to this Contractor shall be carefully protected, neatly connected,
and shall be put in first class condition at time it is submitted for acceptance. The Contractor shall
receive all equipment, sign for same and be responsible for its safety.
3. This Contractor shall coordinate with controls Contractor to ensure that all starters and equipment
are the proper type, have proper interlocks, holding coils, voltage, etc.. This Contractor will check
starter overloads with actual motor full load current nameplate rating.
a. Motors with a marked service factor not less than l.l5 or marked with a temperafure rise not
over 40degrees C. shall be set at 125%o.
b. All other motors shall be set at 7l5Yo.
4. Temperature controls wiring and conduit will be furnished and installed under Heating Contract.
5. Control wiring for all plumbing motors, hot water circulating pumps, domestic hot water
recirculating pumps, sump pumps, sewage ejector, etc., will be installed and wired by the Electrical
Contractor.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect conduit and wireway openings against the entrance of foreign matter by means of plugs or caps.
Cover fixtures, materials, equipment and devices or otherwise protect against damage from any cause,
ARCON 15095 260010‐7BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
both before and after installation. Fixtures, materials, equipment, or condition or replaced, all at no
addifional cost to Owner.
B. Equipment shall be inherently safe and moving parts shall be covered with guards.
3.04 COOPERATION
A. Where jurisdictional rules require the assistance of electrical mechanics in the moving and setting of
electrically powered equipment, provide such assistance.
B. Where work covered by this section connects to equipment furnished under other sections, verifu
electrical work involved in the field and make proper connection to such equipment.
3.05 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Work shall be cleaned prior to the date of "substantial completion" as determined by the Owner's
Representative.
B. Clean equipment, restore all damaged materials, remove grease, oil, chemicals, paint spots and/or stains,
etc., and generally leave the work in A-1 condition.
C. Retouch and/or repaint all factory painted prime and/or finish coats where scratched or damaged.
Wherever retouching will not be satisfactory, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, the Owner's
Representative had the option to require complete repainting until the desired appearance is obtained.
D. Lamps, fixures, lenses, reflectors, etc., shall be cleaned and not sooner than ten ( l0) days prior to date of
substantial completion.
E. Remove from site all tools, equipment, surplus materials, and rubbish pertaining to contract work and
include all costs for such removal and disposition. All rubbish left will be removed by Owner and
services for same shall be back-charged to Contractor against final payout on contract.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION OF COMPLETED SYSTEMS
A. Where not specifically described elsewhere within this electrical specification section, provide owner
with a demonstraton of all complete systems as follows:
1 . Demonstrate to the Onwer's Representative, the essential features of all e lectrical systems specifie d.
2. Show by start/stop operation, etc., the manner of control, resetting of protective devices and the
replacement of fuses, etc.
3. Demonstrate area lighting and show the location of panelboards, dimmers, time switches and
setting, etc.
4. Demonstrate all required maintenance functions.
5. In addition to training specified in othe sections herein, Include a total of8 hours for demonstration
of basic electrical systems. Hours and arrangement to be scheduled by Owner's Representative.
3.07 TESTING AND INSPECTIONS
A. Verifr motors for proper rotation prior to operation.
B. Test all motor controls for proper operations.
C. Test all duplex receptacles for proper polarity and grounding.
D. Measure, load, and record readings on all feeders, motors, transformers and panelboards, etc. Reconnect
panelboard loads as may be necessary to obtain a reasonable balance ofloads on all phases. Variation
shall not exceed l0% phase to phase.
E. Provide three (3) typewritten copies ofthe recordings in bound booklets prior to request for final
payment.
F. Demonstrate by tests, at the request of the Owner's Representative, the compliance of the installation with
these specifications, the drawings, the National Electric Code, and the accepted standards of good
workmanship. These tests shall include operation of lights and equipment, continuity of the conduit
system, grounding resistances, and insulation resistances on not more than ten (10) representative circuits
and any other circuits for which a justifiable reason exists for such tests. All labor and testing equipment
for the performance of these tests shall be furnished by the Contractor.
ARCON 15095 260010-8 BAS:C ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.08 GUARANTEE
A. Where not specifically described elsewhere within this electrical specification section, the complete
electrical system as indicated on the drawings and in these specifications shall be guaranteed by this
Contractor for one (l) year from date offinal acceptance by the Architect against defective material and
workmanship. Defective workmanship and material developing during the guarantee period shall be
repaired or replaced by this Contractor without cost to the Owner.
B. Upon receipt of uritten notice from the Owner or Architect of failure of any part of the guaranteed
materials or equipment during the guarantee period, the affected part or parts shall be repaired or replaced
with new, by and at the expense of the Electrical Contractor.
C. Make all service calls, replacements, repairs and adjustments during the guarantee period without cost to
Owner.
END OF SECT10N 260010
ARCON 15095 260010-9 BAS:C ELECTR:CAL REQU:REMENTS
SECTION 2`0519
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
PARTl GENERAL
l.01 SECT10N INCLUDES
Ao Single conductor building wire.
B. Wire and cable for 600 volts and less.
C. WiHng connectors.
D. Electrical tape.
E.Hcat shHnk tubing.
F, Wire puning lubricant.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREBIEENTS
A. Section 260553‐Identiflcation for Electrical Systems: Identiflcation products and requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM B3‐Standard Speciflcation ibr SoR or Amealed Copper Wire;2013.
B. ASTM B8‐Standard Speciflcation for Concentnc¨Lay‐Stranded Copper Conductors,Hard,
Medium‐Hard,or So食 ;2011.
C. ASTM B33‐Standard Speciflcation for Tin‐Coated So■or Amcaled Copperヽ Vire for Electrical
Purposes;2010 ceapprOved 2014).
D. ASTM B787/B787M‐Standard Speciflcation for 19 Wire Combination Unilay‐Stranded Copper
Conductors for Subsequent lnsulation;2004(Rcapproved 2014).
E. AS‐4D3005‐Standard Speciflcation for Low‐Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloridc Plastic
Pressure…Sensitive Electncal lnsulating Tape;2010.
F. ASTヽ l D4388‐Standard Speciflcation for Nonlnetanic semi_Conducting and Electrically lnsulating
Rubber Tapes;2013.
Go NECA l¨Standard for Good Worknanship in Electrical Construction;National Electrical COntractors
Association;2010.
H.31ECA 120‐Standard for lnstalling Amored Cable(AC)and MCtal‐Clad Cable(MCtt National
Electrical Contractors Association;2012(NECA/NACNIA 102).
I. NEヽ 仏 WC 70‐Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less forthe I)istribution OfElectrical Energy;
National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2009(ANS1/NEMA WC70/1CEA S‐95‐658).
J. blETA ATS‐Acceptance Testing Speciflcations for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;
Intemational Electrical Testing Association;2013(ANS1/NETA ATS).
K.NFPA 70‐National Electrical Code;National Firc Protection Association;Most Recent EditiOn Adopted
by Authority Having Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
L. IAC 180…11linois Administrative Code 180
M. UL 4‐Amored Cable;Current Edition,Including AH Revisions.
N. llL 44… Thennoset‐Insulated Wires and Cables;Curent Edition,Including All Revisions.
0. llL 83‐ Themoplastic‐Insulated Wires and Cables;Curent Edition,Including AH Revisions.
P. lJL 486A‐486B‐Wirё Connectors;Current Edition,Including A∥Revisions.
Q. llL 486C‐Splicing Wire Connectors;Current Edition,Including AH Revisions.
R. lyL 486D‐Scaled Wire Connector Systems;Curent Edition,Including AH Revisions.
S. lyL 510¨ Polyvinyl Chloride,Polyethylene,and Rubber lnsulating Tape;Curent Edition,Including All
Revlslons.
ARCON 15095 260519-1 BU:LDING WIRE AND CABLE
1.04 ADMINISTRATTVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
l. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other sections with
the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for
voltage drop.
2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable
for use with the conductors to be installed.
3. Notifu Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction
before proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITIALS
A. Submit under provisions as described within the general requirements section.
B. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type.
1.06 QUALTTY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60
C. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
I.O7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower than l4
degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation below this
temperature is unavoidable, notify Engineer and obtain direction before proceeding with work.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product
listing.
B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated,
permitted, or required.
C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.
D. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable is not permitted.
E. Service entrance cable is not permitted.
F. Armored cable is permitted only as follows:
l. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:
a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxes to
luminaires.
1) Maximum Length: 6 feet.
2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:
a. Where not approved for use by the authority having jurisdiction.
b. Where exposed to damage.
c. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations.
G. Metal-clad cable is not permitted.
2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Southwire Co.
B. Triangle Wire and Cable.
ARCON 15095 260519‐2BUILDINGヽ ″lRE AND CABLE
2.03 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc.
as required for a complete operating system.
D. Comply with NEMA WC 70.
E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with LIL 83.
F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.
G. Conductor Material:
l. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project.
Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.
2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors
complying with ASTM 83, ASTM B8, or ASTM F787lB 787M unless otherwise indicated.
3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.
H. Minimum Conductor Size:
1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.
a. Exceptions:
l) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.
2) 20 A,120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop.
3) 20 4,277 V circuits longerthan 150 feet: l0 AWG, for voltage drop.
I. Conductor Color Coding:
l. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority havingjurisdiction.
Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.
2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.
3. Color Code:
a. 480Y1277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:
l) Phase A: Brown.
2) Phase B: Orange.
3) Phase C: Yellow.
4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray.
b. 208Y1120 V,3 Phase,4 Wire System:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue.
4) Neutral/Grounded: White.
c. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.
d. Isolated Ground, All Systems: Green with yellow stripe.
e. Travelers for 3-Way and 4-Way Switching: Pink.
f. For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing color code
when existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the authority having
jurisdiction.
2.04 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE
A. Manufacturers:
l. Copper Building Wire:
a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com.
b. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com.
c. SouthwireCompany: www.southwire.com.
B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
C. ConductorStranding:
ARCON 15095 260519‐3BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
l. Feeders and Branch Circuits:
a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
E. Insulation:
l. Copper Building Wire: Type THI{N/THWN or THFIN/THWN-2, except as indicated below.a. Installed Exterior or Underground: Type XHHW-2.
F. Conductor: Copper.
G. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
2.05 ARMORED CABLE
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type AC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 4, and listed for use in
classified firestop systems to be used.
B. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
C. Insulation: Type THHN.
D. Grounding: Combination of interlocking armor and integral bonding wire.
E. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape.
2.06 WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be
connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-4868 or UL 486C as applicable.
B. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:
1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors.2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression
connectors.
C. Wiring Connectors for Terminations:
l. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression
connectors where connectors are.required.
D. Twist'on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 Y,221 degrees F for standard applications and 302
degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D
for damp and wet locations.
E. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.
F. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.
2.07 WIRINGACCESSORIES
A. Electrical Tape:
l. Manufacturers:
a. 3M: www.3m.com.
b. PlymouthRubberEuropa: www.plymouthrubber.com.
2. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying with UL
5 I 0; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for
application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221
degrees F.
3. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) tape, complying with ASTM
D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 194
degrees F and short-term266 degrees F overload service.
4. Electrical Filler Tape: Rubber-based insulating moldable putty, minimum thickness of 125 mil;
suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 176 degrees F.5. Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible, all-weather
vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil.
ARCON 15095 260519‐4BU!LDiNG VVIRE AND CABLE
B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V; suitable for
direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D.
C. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable
for use at the installation temperature.
D. Use mechanical compression for 6 AWG or larger or any connection made within any type of exterior
junction box or device to include. Cover connector with insulating tape or heat shrinkable insulation
equivalent to 150%o conductor insulation.
E. Outdoor boxes (Including building mounted boxes used for outdoor devices) and undergroud connections
of any type #12 to #6 AWG.
l. Ideal Weatherproof wire connectors or equal.
a. Silicon filled wire connectors designed to meet UL 486D standards
b. Size per manufacturer for number and wire sizes
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Verifr that interior of building has been protected from weather.
B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to
accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.
D. Verifr that raceway installation is complete and supported.
E. Veri! that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
F. Verifu that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. CircuitingRequirements:
l. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
2. When circuit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required.
3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.
4. Maintain separation of Class l, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power-limited
circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.
5. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70.
6. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are shown as separate,
combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted.
7. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neuhal/grounded conductors among up
to three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is not
permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit.
8. Provide oversized neutral/grounded conductors where indicated and as specified below.
a. Provide 200 percent rated neutral for feeders fed from K-rated transformers.
b. Provide 200 percent rated neutral for feeders serving panelboards with 200 percent rated
neutral bus.
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA l.
D. Install armored cable (Type AC) in accordance with NECA 120.
E. Installation in Raceway:
L Tape ends ofconductors and cables to prevent infiltration ofmoisture and other contaminants.
2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.
ARCON 15095 260519‐5BU:LDINGヽ Ⅳ!RE AND CABLE
3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling
tension and sidewall pressure.
4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by
the manufacturer.
F. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner.
G. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and
methods approved by the authority havingjurisdiction. Provide independent support from building
structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.
l. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do
not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay on ceiling tiles.2. Installation in Vertical Raceways: Provide supports where vertical rise exceeds permissible limits.
H. Terminate cables using suitable fittings.
l. Armored Cable (Type AC):
a. Use listed fittings and anti-short, insulating bushings.
b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or insulation. Do
not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor.
I. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.
J. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures.
K. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside
enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.
L. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.
l. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in
conduit bodies or wiring gutters.
2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting,
nicking or damaging conductors.
3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.
4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and
other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.
5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacfurer's recommended torque
settings.
6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies.
M. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the
application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors.
1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or
heat shrink tubing.
a. For taped connections, first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical tape or
electrical filler tape, followed by outer covering ofvinyl insulating electrical tape.
2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically desigrred forthe connectors, electrical tape, or
heat shrink tubing.
a. For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical
tape.
b. For taped connections, follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outer covering of
moisture sealing electrical tape.
3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing.
N. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.
O. Color Code Legend: Provide identification label identifing color code for ungrounded conductors at
each piece offeeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch
circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system.
P. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating ofpartitions and other elements, using materials and
methods as required.
ARCON 15095 260519-6 BUILD!NG W:RE AND CABLE
a. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices,
including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.
R. Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
S. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions.
1. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned.
2. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and
lengths required.
3 . Include wire and cable of lengths required to install connected devices within l0 ft of location
shown.
T. Use wiring methods indicated.
U. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
V. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
W. Protect exposed cable from damage.
X. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
Y. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
Z. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature
rise.
AA. Identifr and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 260553 . Identifu each conductor with
its circuit number or other designation indicated.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7 .3.2. The insulation resistance test is
required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required.
D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.
E. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.3.2.
END OF SECTION 260519
ARCON 15095 260519‐7BUILDING VViRE AND CABLE
SECTION 2`0529
CUTTING,PATCHING,SLEEVES,HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PARTl GENERAL
l.01 GENERAL CONDIT10NS
A. Equipment shaH not bc held in place by its own dead weight. Base anchor fasteners shan be provided in
each case.
B. AH cutting and patching ofnew and/or existing surfaces will be the responsibility ofthe Electrical
Contractor.Surfaces win be restored to its original condition and unH be to the satisfaction ofthe Owner
and the Architect.A∥patching will be by tradesmen nomlally employed by each specialty and win be
paid by the Electrical Contractor.
C. Contractor shan give the Architect complete inforlnation as to size ofopenings in floOrs,waHs,ctc.,so
that such openings inay be provided as the bullding progresses.
D.IfOpenings are omitted or incorrect through failure to follow above instructions,the ContractOr shall
engage the Contractor fbr general flnishes cOnstruction to cut and patch at his Own expense to the
satisfactio■ofthe Architect.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Support and attachent components for equipment,conduit,cable,boxes,and other electrical wOrk.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A123/A123M‐Standard Specincation for Zinc(HOt‐Dip Galvanized)COatings on lron and Steel
Products;2013.
B. ASTM A153/A1531M‐Standard Speciflcation for Zinc Coating(HOt‐Dip)on lrOn and steel Hardware;
2009.
C. ASTM B633‐Standard Speciflcation for Electrodeposited Coatings ofZinc on lron and Steel;2013.
D.NIIF卜 曇 ‐4‐Metal Framing Standards Publication;Metal Framing Manufacturers Association;2004.
E. ICC‐ES AC01‐Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in MasOwy Elements;2009.
F. ICC‐ES AC106‐Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners(SCrew Anchors)in Masory Elements;
2006
G. ICC‐ES AC193‐Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchorsin Concrete Elements;2010
H. ICC…ES AC308‐Acceptance Criteria for Post‐Installed Adhesive Anchors in COncrete Elements;2009.
I. NECA l‐Standard for Good Worimnanship in Elecmcal cOnstⅢction;National Electrical COntractors
Association;2010.
・ げ 鷺 講 ざ 各期 lを 常 ∬ぶ 謂 輩 淵 |せ ズ1聰 i:鳳 :蹴 胤 訛 t鮫 締 配 irm°
n Adoメ ed
l.04 QUALIη 口`ASSURANCEPART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SUPPORT AND AttACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Ceneral Requirements:
1. ProⅥde all required hangers,supports,anchors,fasteners,flttings,accessoHes,and hardware as
necessary for the complete instanation ofelectrical work.
2 Provide products listed,classifled,and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended,where
appHcable.
3. Where support and attachnent componenttypes and sizes are not indicated,select in accOrdance
with manufacturers application criteHa as required for the load to be supported with a minimum
safety factor of_____.Include consideration for vibration,cquipment operation,and shock 10ads
where applicable.
4. Do not use products for applications Other than as pemitted by plFPA 70 and prOductlisting.
ARCON 15095AND SUPPORTS 260529‐l CUTT:NG,PATCH:NG,SLEEVES,HANGERS
5. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where installed.a. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM 8633.
b. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM
Al23/A123M or ASTM Al53/At53M.
B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be supported.l. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.
2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.
C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.
D. Metal Channel (Stru| Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and
associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly ofsupports.1. Comply with MFMA-4.
E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.
F. Anchors and Fasteners:
I ' Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener tlpes
indicated for the specified applications.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Expansive screw anchors, shields, or other fastening items containing lead or other material that might
loosen or melt under fire conditions shall not be used. No items shall rest on or depend for support on
suspended ceiling media (tiles, lath, plaster, splines, etc.).
B. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type
adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit.
C. Sleeves for conduits shall be mild steel tube, galvanized inside and outside, equal to rigid conduit.
D. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized angles or channels
supported with 3/8" threaded rods anchored to the building construction. Any necessary Unistrut and/or
steel to span construction members will be furnished and installed.
E. Anchors and Fasteners:
l. Do not use powder-actuated anchors, spring clips, or beam clamps.2. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, or preset inserts.3. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel spring clips, steel ramset fasteners, or welded
fasteners.
4. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors.
5. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners.6. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts.
7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
8. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
F. Formed Steel Channel:
l. Product: Unistrut
PART3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECAl.
C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or
other systems.
D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Engineer, do not provide support from suspended ceiling
support system or ceiling grid.
E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Engineer, do not provide support from roofdeck.
ARCON 15095 260529.2 CUTTING, PATCHING, SLEEVES, HANGERS
AND SUPPORTS
F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer.
G. Equipment Support and Attachment:
1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support
equipment as required.
2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on hollow stud
walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.
3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to
provide space between equipment and mounting surface.
4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own
weight for support.
H. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.
I. Remove temporary supports.
END OF SECTION 260529
ARCON 15095 260529-3 CUTTINGI PAttCHING,SLEEVES,HANGERS
AND SUPPORttS
SECT10N 260534
CONDUIT
PARTl GENERAL
l.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit(RMC).
B. Aluminum rigid metal conduit ttIC).
C. Intemediate metal conduit(IMC).
D.PVC‐coated galvanized steel Hgid metal conduit rRMC).
E.Flexible metal conduit cMC).
F. Liquidtight ne対 bic metal conduit(LFMC)。
G.Electrical metallic tubing cMT).
H. Rigid polyvinyl chloride(PVC)COnduit.
I. Conduit flttings.
J. Accessories.
K. Conduit,flttings and conduit bodies.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREIⅥENTS
A. Section 033000‐Cast‐in‐Place Concrete:Concrete encasement ofconduits.
B Section 260526‐Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
C Section 260529‐CUTTING,PATCIIING,SLEEVES,園 GERS AplD SUPPORTS.
D. Section 260553‐Identiflcation for Electrical Systems.
E. Section 260537‐13oxes.
F. Section 260553‐Identiflcation for Electrical Systems: Identiflcation products and requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ANSI C80.1‐AmeHcan National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit(ERSC);2005.
B.ANSI C80.3‐Ame五 can National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing cMTヽ 2005.
C.ANSI C80.5‐AmeHcan National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminuln Conduit(ERAC);2005.
D.ANSI C80.6‐AmeHcan National Standard for ElectHcal lntermediate Mctal COnduit(EIMC);2005.
E. NECA l‐Standard for Good Worhanship in Electrlcal Conslmction;National Electrical Contractors
Association;2010.
F. NECA 101‐Standard for lnstalling Steel Conduits(Rigid,IMC,EMT);National Electrical Contractors｀
Association;2013.
G.NECA 102‐Standard for lnstalling Aluminum Rigid Metal Conduit National Electrical Contractors
Association;2004.
H.NECA lH‐Standard for lnstalling Nonmetallic Raceways(RNC,ENT,LFNC);National Electrical
Contractors Association;2003.
I. ■lEルLへ FB l‐ Fittings,Cast Metal Boxes,and Conduit Bodies for Conduit,Electrical Metallic Tubing,
and Cable;National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2012(ANS1/NIEMA FB l).
J. NENIA RN l‐Polyvinyl‐Chloride(PVC)Extemally Coated Galvanized Rigid steel Conduit and
lntemediate Metal Conduit;National Electrical Manufacturers Association;20o5.
K.NENIA TC 2‐Electrical PolyvinyI Chloridc(PVC)COnduit;National Electrical Manufacturers
Association;2013.
L. NENIA TC 3‐PolyvinyI Chloride(PVC)Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing;National
Electrical Manufacturers Association;2015.
ARCON 15095 260534‐1CONDUIT
M. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
N. UL I - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
O. UL 6 - ElectricalRigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
P. tll- 6,{ - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
a. LIL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
R. UL 5l48 - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
S. LIL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition, Including
All Revisions.
T. IIL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
U. W 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. All building wiring shall be routed in approved metallic raceway (conduit) unless otherwise specifically
noted.
B. All conduit shall be routed concealed (above lay-in ceiling, within walls, below grade or slab, etc.) within
all finished spaces unless otherwise noted.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions as described within the general requirements section.
B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit,
metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, flexible nonmetallic conduit, nonmetallic tubing, fittings, and
conduit bodies.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60
C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and
shown.
1.07 DELMRY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance ofdebris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate
covering.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.OI CONDUITAPPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and
product listing.
B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the
specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the most restrictive
requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid
metal conduit.
C. Underground:
l. Under Slab on Grade: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
2. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
3. Exterior, Embedded Within Concrete: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
ARCON 15095 260534-2 CONDU:T
4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit
where emerging from underground.
5. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2 inch (53 mm) trade size is provided, use
galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends.
6. Where steel conduit emerges from concrete into soil, use corrosion protection tape to provide
supplementary corrosion protection for a minimum of 4 inches on either side of where conduit
emerges or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
D. Embedded Within Concrete:
l. Within Slab on Grade (within structural slabs only where approved by Structural Engineer): Use
galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
2. Within Slab Above Ground (within structural slabs only where approved by Structural Engineer):
Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
3. Within Concrete Walls Above Ground: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
E. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
F. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
G. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
H. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
I. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
J. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use intermediate metal conduit (IMC).
K. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
L. Corrosive Locations Above Ground: Use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or aluminum
rigid metal conduit.
l. Corrosive locations include, but are not limited to:
a. Cooling towers.
b. Pools and pool equipment rooms
M. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit.
1. Maximum Length: 6 feet.
N. Connections to Vibrating Equipment:
1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit.
2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
3. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated.
4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to:
a. Transformers.
b. Motors.
c. Generators
O. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit.
2.02 CONDUITREQUIREMENTS
A. Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they
comply with specified requirements, are free from corrosion, and integrity is verified by pulling a mandrel
through them.
B. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.
C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable forthe purpose intended.
D. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
l. Branch Circuits: ll2inch (16 mm) trade size.
2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 314 inch (21 mm) trade size.
3. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 3/8 inch (12 mm) trade size.
E. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum
size requirements specifi ed.
ARCON 15095 260534‐3CONDUIT
2.03 ALUMINUM RrcrD METAL CONDUTT (RMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC aluminum rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.5 and listed
and labeled as complying with UL 6A.
B. Fittings:
l. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as
complying with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use aluminum.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression
(gland) type fittings are not permitted.
2.04 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with ANSI
C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying withUL 1242.
B. Fittings:
l. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as
complying with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression
(gland) type fittings are not permitted.
2.05 PVC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A. Manufacturers:
1. Robroy Industries; _: www.robroy.com.
B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl chloride
@VC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.
C. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil.
D. PVC-CoatedFittings:
l. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed.
2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with tll. 5148.
3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
4. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil.
E. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of
l5 mil.
2.06 FLEXTBLE METAL CONDUTT (FMC)
A. Manufacturers as described above.
B. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as
complying with IIL l, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.
C. Fittings:
l. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as complying with UL
5148.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
D. Description: Interlocked steel construction.
E. Fittings: NEMAFB l.
2.07 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)
A. Manufacturers as described above.
B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduit Iisted
and labeled as complying with UL 360.
C. Fittings:
ARCON 15095 260534‐4CONDUl丁
1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as complying with UL
5148.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
D. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
E. Fittings: NEMAFB 1.
2.08 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Manufacturers as described above.
B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed
and labeled as complying with UL 797.
C. Fittings:
l. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as complying with tll,
5148.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) type.
a. Do not use indentertype connectors and couplings.
D. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
E. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB l; steel compression type . Steel set screw qpe shall be used
for conduit runs withing block walls.
2.09 RrGrD POLWINYL CHLORTDE (PVC) CONDUTT
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and
listed and labeled as complying with UL 65 l; Schedule 80 unless otherwise indicated; rated for use with
conductors rated 90 degrees C.
B. Fittings:
l. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.
2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with LIL
651; material to match conduit.
2.IO ACCESSORIES
A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil.
B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit
to be installed.
C. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings
to be installed.
D. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force.
E. Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be installed.
F. Modular Seals for Conduit Penetrations: Rated for minimum of 40 psig; Suitable for the conduits to be
installed.
PART3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verifr that field measurements are as shown on drawings.
B. Verifr that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.
C. Verifr that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
D. Verifr routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
E. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to
complete wiring system.
ARCON 15095 260534‐5CONDUIT
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA l.
C. Install aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 102.
D. Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA I 0l .
E. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by the
manufacturer.
F. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA l l l.
G. Conduit Routing:
l. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required.2. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.
3. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:a. Electrical rooms.
b. Mechanical equipment rooms.
c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.
4. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed:
a. Across roofs.
b. Across top of parapet walls.
c. Across building exterior surfaces.
5. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest possible
manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or perpendicular to buitding
structure and surfaces, following surface contours where practical.
6. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.7. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent ofthree 90 degree bends between pull
points.
8. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.
9. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings
where moisture may collect.
10. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems.
I 1. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This includes. but is
not limited to:
a. Heaters.
b. Hot water piping.
c. Flues.
12. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack.
H. Conduit Support:
L Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section260529 using suitable
supports and methods approved by the authority havingjurisdiction.
2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,
ductwork, or other systems.
3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support fiom ceiling support system. Do
not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.
I. Connections and Terminations:
1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduitjoint compound on field-cut threads ofgalvanized steel
conduits prior to making connections.
2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings
or split couplings. Do not use running threads.
3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into
connectors.
ARCON 15095 260534‐6CONDU!丁
5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for
dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.
6. Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box or enclosure,
provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with finished floor.7. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors.8. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity.
Penetrations:
1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut strucfural members, including footings and grade beams,
without approval of Stmctural Engineer.
2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves
flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.
5. Seal interior ofconduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent
entry of moisfure and gases.
6. Provide suitable modular seal where conduits penetrate exerior wall below grade.7. Where conduits penetrate walerproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of
membrane.
8. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs
where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necissary, seal as
indicated or as required to preserve integrity ofroofing system and maintain roofwarranty. Include
proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals.9. Provide metal escutcheon plates for conduit penetrations exposed to public view.10. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating ofpartitions and other elements, using materials
and methods specified in Section 078400.
Underground Installation :
l. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 260553 along entire conduit length
for service entrance where not concrete-encased.
Embedment Within Stmctural Concrete Slabs (only where approved by Structural Engineer):
I . Install conduits within middle one third of slab thickness.
2. Secure conduits to prevent floating ormovement during pouring ofconcrete.
Concrete Encasement: Where conduits not otherwise embedded within concrete are indicated to be
concrete-encased, provide concrete in accordance with Section 033000 with minimum concrete cover of
3 inches on all sides unless otherwise indicated.
Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Where conduits cross boundaries of hazardous (classified) locations,
provide sealing fittings located as indicated or in accordance with NFPA 70.
Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and
expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This
includes, but is not limited to:
1. Where conduits cross structuraljoints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.
Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial
temperafure differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near
the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to:1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.
Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed
by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end.
Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.
Identify conduits in accordance with Section 260553.
L.MN.
0.
P.
Q.
ARCON 15095 260534‐7CONDU!T
3.03 FIELD QUAHTY CONTROL
A. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized flnishes using zlnc‐Hch paint recommended by Fnanufacturer.
Replace components that exhibit signs ofcorrosion.
B. Where coating ofPVC_coated galvanized stecl rigid metal conduit(RMC)contains cuts or abrasions,
repair in accordance with inanufacturer's instructions.
C. Correct deflciencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.
3.04 CLEANING
A.Clean interior ofconduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.
3.05 1NTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. InstaH conduit to preseeⅣe Are resistance rating ofpartitions and other elements,using mateHals and
methods specifled within applicabic sections ofbullding speciflcation.
B. Route conduit through roofopenings for piping and duch″ork wherever possible. ヽ西■ere separate rooflng
penetration is required,coordinate location and instanation incthod with rooflng instanation..
END OF SECTION 260534
ARCON 15095 260534-8 CONDUIT
SECTION 260537
BOXES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used asjunction and pull boxes.
B. Cabinets and enclosures, includingjunction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches.
I.O2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260529 - CUTTING, PATCHING, SLEEVES, HANGERS AND SLIPPORTS.
B. Section 260534 - Conduit:
l. Conduit bodies and other fittings.
2. Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between
pulling points.
C. Section 262?26 - Wiring Devices:
l. Wallplates.
2. Additional requirements for locating boxes for wiring devices.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA I - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2010.
B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2010.
C. NEMA FB I - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing,
and Cable;NationalElectrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSIAIEMA FB l).
D. NEMA OS I - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSINEMA OS 1).
E. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSINEMA OS 2).
F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 20 I 4.
G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
H. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
I. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including
All Revisions.
J. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
K. UL 5l4A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATTVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
l. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other
potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical
equipment required by NFPA 70.
2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of
the actual equipment to be installed.
3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps,
support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70.
4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected
conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70.
ARCON 15095 260537‐1BOXES
5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc. installed under
other sections or by others.
6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity.
7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted
boxes where indicated.
8. Notify Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction
before proceeding with work.
B. IAC 180 - Illinois Administrative Code 180
1.05 SUBMIT'TALS
A. Submit under provisions as described within the general requirements section.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for outlet and device boxes,
cabinets and enclosures, and floor boxes.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of product.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations for outlet and device boxes, pull boxes, cabinets and
enclosures, floor boxes, and underground handhole enclosures.
I.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
I.O7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BoxES
A. GeneralRequirements:
1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70
and product listing.
2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to
accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.
3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable
minimum size requirements specified.
5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate.
B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes:
l. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated orrequired.
2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or
required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers.
3. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes where exposed galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or
exposed intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is used.
4. Use cast aluminum boxes where aluminum rigid metal conduit is used.
5. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.
6. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.
7. Use raised covers suitable for the type ofwall construction and device configuration where
required.
8. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.
9. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.
10. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS l, and list and label as complying with tll. 514A.
I l. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL 5l4A;
furnish with threaded hubs.
ARCON 15095 260537‐2BOXES
12. Boxes for Supponing Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of
load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where
required.
13. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construcfion. Do not use
fi eld-connected gangable boxes.
14. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 262726.
C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:
1 . Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 5084.2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type l, painted steel.
b. OutdoorLocations: Type 3R, painted steel.
3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:
a. Provide screw-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 GENERAL
A. In general, boxes shall be galvanized, pressed steel, have depth and shape best suited to the intended use,
and contain knockouts ofquantity and size equal to the conduit runs to be connected thereto. All boxes
shall be securely fastened in place and shall provide sufficient support to the purpose intended.
B. Outlet boxes for mounting fixtures shall be equipped with slip-in or boltless fixture studs. Hickey studs
will NOT be acceptable. Installation of the larger fixhrres shall be made with hangers to support fixtures
independently of outlet box.
C. Outlet boxes not mounting fixtures and at which no connections are made shall be equipped with steel
cover plates. Although no connections are made in such outlets, sufficient wire shall be provided in each
for making fufure connection.
D. Ceiling outlet boxes shall be galvanized, octagon, 4" x 7-l/2" deep without fixture stud, 2-118" deep with
fixture stud.
E. Concrete boxes where used shall have a minimum of 1" concrete cover.
F. Exterior outlet boxes shall be weather-resistant (rain tight), having appropriate covers fitted with gaskets
and fastened with screws. Boxes shall be Crouse-Hinds series CPS or Series V., as applicable.
G. Switch outlet boxes for local light control switches, convenience outlets, telephone, etc., shall be
galvanized, square 4" x l-112" , with raised cover to fit flush with finish wall line. Multiple gang switch
outlets shall consist of the required gang with raised covers. Where outlet boxes occur in exposed
concrete block walls, boxes shall be installed in block cavity with a raised square edge tile cover of
sufftcient depth to extend out to face ofblock. Outlet boxes for special purposes shall be suitable for the
purpose intended as herein specified and shown on the drawings.
H. See drawings for additional information. The above is the minimum specification unless otherwise noted
on the drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Veri! that field measurements are as shown on drawings.
B. Verifr that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes.
C. Veri$ that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA I and, where applicable,
NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not
indicated.
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
NFPA 70.
ARCON 15095 260537‐3BOXES
D. Provide separale boxes for emergency power and normal power systems.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems.
F. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are indicated or
permitted.
H. Box Locations:
1. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others.
a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 262726.
2. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.
3. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at
different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line.
5. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide minimum 6
inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated.
6. Acoustic-Rated Walls: Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back;
provide minimum 24 inches horizontal separation.
7. Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire resistance will
not be reduced.
a. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum
24 inches separation where wall is constructed with individual noncommunicating stud cavities
or protect both boxes with listed putty pads.
b. Do not install flush-mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches or such that the total
aggregate area ofopenings exceeds 100 square inches for any 100 square feet ofwall area.
8. Locatejunction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation ofconductors, and
to limit conduit length andlor number of bends between pulling points in accordance with Section
260534.
9. Locatejunction and pull boxes in the following areas, unless otherwise indicated or approved by the
Architect:
a. Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings.
b. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.
c. Electrical rooms.
d. Mechanical equipment rooms.
I. Box Supports:
l. Secure and support boxes in accordance withNFPA 70 and Section260529 using suitable supports
and methods approved by the authority havingjurisdiction.
2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes
used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70.
Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.
3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or ceiling support
system.
J. Install boxes plumb and level.
K. Flush-MountedBoxes:
1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that front
edge ofbox or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than l/4 inch or
does not project beyond finished surface.
2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised
cover is flush with finished surface.
3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum,
plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at the edge ofthe box.
L. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.
M. Metallic Floor Boxes: Install box level at the proper elevation to be flush with finished floor.
ARCON 15095 260537‐4BOXES
N. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds
300 v.
O. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and
methods specified in Section 078400.
P. Close unused box openings.
a. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or
desigaated for future use.
R. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.
S. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations.
1. Adjust box locations up to l0 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until ready for
installation of conductors.
END OF SECTION 260537
ARCON 15095 260537‐ 5 BOXES
SECr10N 260553
1DENTIFICAT10N FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PARTl GENERAL
l.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Identiflcation for Equipment
l. Panelboards
2. Panelboard Schedules
3. Existing Panelboard Schedules
4. Identiflcation labels
l.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
l,03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.hTFPA 70‐National Electrical Code;National Fire Protection Association;Most Recent Edition Adopted
by Authority Having Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
B. IAC 180‐1llinois Administrat市 e Code 180
1.04 ADMINISTRATⅣE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1. VeH～Anal designations for equipment,systems,and components to be identined prior t。
fabrication ofidentiflcation products.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not conccalitems to be identifled,in locations such as above suspended cellings,until
identincatiOn products have been instaned.
2. Do not instaH identiflcation products until flnal surface flnishes and painting are complete.
1.05 SUBⅣIITTALS
A. Submit under provisions as described unthin the general requirements section.
B.Product Data:Provide catalog data for nalneplates,labels,and markers.
C. Manufacturers lnsmctiOns: Indicate application conditions and liinitations ofuse stipulated by product
testing agency. Include insmctiOns for storage,handling,protection,examination,preparation and
installation ofproduct.
1.0` QUAHW ASSURANCE
A.Confom to requirements ofNFPA 70.
B. Conforln to 11linois Administrative Code 1 80 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 1DENIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Identiflcation for Equipment
l. Usc identincation nameplate or idendncati。■label to identi″ each piece ofelectrical distribution
and control equipment and associated sections,comparments,and components.
a, Panelboards:
1) USe identincatiOn nameplate to identi,panelbOard nalne.
2)Use COmputer Generated Directory to identi取 load(S)Served for panelboards with a
door.Identl,spares and spaces.
3) For power panelboards unthout a door,use identiflcation nameplate to identi取 load(S)
served for each branch device.Identl,spares and spaces.
PART 3 EXECUT10N
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturers insttuctions.
B. Degreasc and clean surfaces to receive narneplates and labels.
ARCON 15095 260553-l lDENTIFICAT10N FOR ELECTR:CAL
SYSTEMS
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. lnstall products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and
maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:
l. Surface-MountedEquipment: Enclosurefront.
2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.
3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access.
4. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.
5. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.
6. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point ofaccess.
C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.
D. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and
edges properly sealed.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs of
improper adhesion.
B. Panel identification
l. Provide identification for each lighting and appliance panelboard with a computer generated
directory accurately indicating rooms and/or equipment being serviced, sealed in plastic and
attached to door interior, etc. Note: Each index shall be sequenced in accord with actual panel
circuiting (i.e. left side - l, 3, 5, 7, etc., right side - 2, 4, 6, etc.).
2. Existing panelboards that require circuit modifications and/or additions shall have their circuit
schedule completely replaced. All existing to remain circuits shall be traced to their load as
required and indicated on the circuit schedule.
END OF SECTION 260553
ARCON 15095 260553‐2 :DENT:F:CAT10N FOR ELECTR:CAL
SYSttEMS
SECT10N 262717
EQUIPMENT WIRING
PARTl GENERAL
l.01 SECT10N INCLUDES
A. Electrical connections to equipment.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260519‐BUⅡI)ING WIRE AND CABLE.
B. Section 260534‐Conduit.
C. Section 260537‐Boxes.
D. Section 262726‐Winng Devices.
E. Section 262818‐Enclosed Switches.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NENIA WD l‐General Color Requirements for Wiring De宙 ces;National Electrical Manufacturers
Association;199962010).
B. NENIA WD 6‐Wiring Devices‐Dimensional Requirements;National Electrical Manufacturers
Association;2012.
C. NFPA 70‐National Electrical Code;National Firc Protection Association;Most Recent Edition Adopted
by Authonty Having JuHsdiction,Including AH Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
D.IAC 180‐11linois Administrat市 e Code 180.
1.04 ADⅣIINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Obtain and review shop drawings,product data,manufacturers wiHng diagrams,and manufacturers
instructions for equipment fumished under other sections.
2. Deterrnine connectiOn locations and requirements.
B. Sequcncing:
1. InstaH rough‐in ofelectrical connections before installation ofequipment is required.
2. Make electncal connections before required start‐up ofequipment.
1.05 SUBⅣIITTALS
Ao Subnlit under provisions as described wlthin the general requirements section.
B. Product Data: Provide wiHng device inanufacturer's catalog infonnation showing diinenslons,
conflgurations,and construction.
C. Manufactureris lnstructions: Indicate application conditions and lilnitations ofuse stipulated by prOduct
testing agency. Include instructions fbr storage,handling,protection,exanlination,preparation,and
instanation ofproduct.
1.0` QUAL11口 F ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements ofNFPA 70.
B. Conforln to lllinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60.
C. Products: Listed,classifled,and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
1.07 C00RDINATION
A.Obtain and re宙 ew shop drawings,product datら manufacturers wiHng diagrams,and manufacturers
instructions for equipment fbmished under other sections.
B. Deterlnine connection locations and requirements.
C. Sequence rough‐in ofelectrical connections to coordinate with insta∥ation ofequipment.
D. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start‐up ofequipment.
ARCON 15095 262717‐1EQU:PMENT VⅥRING
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS
A. Disconnect Switches: As specified in Section 262818 and in individual equipment sections.
B. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 262726.
C. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 260534.
D. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 260519.
E. Boxes: As specified in Section 260537.
PART3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verifr that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.
3.02 ELECTRICALCONNECTIONS
A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.
B. Final connections to all motors shall be made with flexible steel conduit. Final connections to roof
exhaust fans shall be made with "Sealtite" waterproof flexible conduit. Provide additional ground wire to
:rssure a perfect ground connection.
C. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with
watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.
D. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures
encountered.
E. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.
F. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.
G. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment
connection boxes.
H. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment
wiring requirements.
I. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.
J. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring
requirements.
K. Coolers and Freezers: Cut and seal conduit openings in freezer and cooler walls, floor, and ceilings.
L. Seal roof penetrations as recommended by roofing manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 262717
ARCON 15095 262717‐2EQUIPMENT VⅥRING
SECTION 2`272`
WIRING DEVICES
PARTl GENERAL
l.01 SECT10N INCLUDES
A. Wan switches.
Bo Receptacles.
C.WaH plates.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260537‐】Boxes.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. FS W‐C‐596‐Connector,Electrical,Power,General Speciflcation for;Federal Specincation;Revision
G,2001.
B. FS W‐S‐896‐Switches,Toggle(Toggle and Lock),Flush‐1■ounted(General Speciflcation);Federal
Speciflcation;Revision F,1999.
C. hTECA l‐Standard for Good Worklnanship in Electrical Construction;National Electrical Contractors
Association;2010.
D.NEヽ
“
WDl¨General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices;National Electrical Manufacturers
Association;1999(R2010).
E.NENIA WD 6‐WiHng De宙 ce― Dimensional Specincations;National Electrical Manufacturers
Association;2012.
F. NFPA 70‐National Electrical Code;National Fire PЮ tection Association;MOst Recent Edition Adopted
by Authority Having Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
G.IAC 180‐11linois Administrative Code 180
H. llL 20‐Ceneral‐Use Snap Switches;Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
I. llL 498‐Attachnent Plugs and Receptacles;Curent Edition,Including All Revisions.
J. UL 514D‐Cover Plates for Flush‐Mounted Wiring Devices;Curent Edition,Including A∥Revisions.
K. UL 943‐Ground‐Fault Circuit‐Interrupters;Curent Edition,Including A∥Revisions.
1.04 SUBⅣEITTALS
A. Subnlit under provislons as described within the general requirements section.
B.Product Data:Provide manufacturers cata10g infomation showing dimensions,colors,and
conflgurations.
1.05 QUALIη n`ASSURANCE
A. Confonm to requirements ofNFPA 70.
B. Conforln to lninois Adnlinistrative Code 180 and aH building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60
C.Manufacturer Qualincations:Company specializing in manufacturing the pЮ ducts specined in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIANUFACTURERS
A.Hubbell lncorporated;_____:―・hubbell‐wiring.com.
B Leviton Manufacturing Company,Inc;____:―・leviton.com.
C. Pass ttt Seymour,a brand ofLegrand North America,Inc;______1 -・ legrand.us
D.Source Limitations:For each type ofwiring device mmish products produced by a single manufacturer
and obtained fronl a single supplier.
ARCON 15095 262726‐1VV!RING DEV:CES
2.02 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS
A. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for receptacles installed
outdoors or in damp or wet locations.
B. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.
C. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed in kitchens.
D. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles serving electric drinking fountains.
2.03 ALL WIRING DEVICES
A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
B. Finishes:
1. Wiring Devices Installed in Finished Spaces: White with stainless steel wall plate unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: White with galvanized steel wall plate unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations: White with specified weatherproof cover
unless otherwise indicated.
2.04 WALL SWITCHES
A. Wall Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver
alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD I and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and
where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.
l. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back
wiring with separate ground terminal screw.
B. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade,20 A, 1201277 V with standard toggle type switch
actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four
way as indicated on the drawings.
1. Single pole
a. HubbelllBLl22l
b. Leviton 1221 - 2
c. Pass and SeymourPS20ACII
2. Two pole
a. Hubbell I{BL 1222
b. Leviton 1222-2
c. Pass and SeymourPS20AC2I
3. Three way
a. Hubbell 1223
b. Levition 1223-2
c. Pass and SeymourPS20AC3I
C. Pilot Light Wall Switches: Indusfrial specification grade,20 A, 1201277 V with red illuminated standard
toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; illuminated with load on; single pole single throw,
double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.
D. Locking Wall Switches: lndustrial specification grade,20 A, 1201277 V with lever type keyed switch
actuator and maintained contacts; switches keyed alike; single pole single throw, double pole single
throw three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.
2.05 INTERIORRECEPTACLES
A. Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD I and NEMA WD 6,
and listed as complying with LIL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the
drawings.
1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back
wiring with separate ground terminal screw.
ARCON 15095 262726‐2VVIRING DEVICES
2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.
B. ConvenienceReceptacles:
l. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade,20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R;
single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.
a. Hubbell I{8L 5362
b. Leviton 5362
c. Pass and Seymour 5362A
C. GFCI Receptacles:
l. GFCI Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-testing, with feed-through protection and light to
indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection; listed as complying with UL 943,
class A.
2. Standard GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125Y, NEMA 5-20&
rectangular decorator style.
a. Hubbell GFR5352A
b. Levition 7899
c. Pass and Seymour 2094
3. Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex , 20A, l25Y , NEMA
5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with LIL
498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.
2.06 WALL PLATES
A. WallPlates: Comply with LIL 514D.
l. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types ofcorresponding wiring devices.
2. Size: Standard; _.3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.
B. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 spec grade stainless steel.
C. Galvanized Steel Wall Plates: Rounded corners and edges, with corrosion resistant screws.
D. Weatherproof Covers for Damp Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with self-closing hinged cover and
corrosion-resistant screws; Iisted as suitable for use in wet locations with cover closed.
E. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover and
corrosion-resistant screws; Iisted as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs
connected and identified as extra-duty type.
F. Plates shall be held in place with screws finished to match the plates.
PART3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verifo that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
B. Verifu that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly
sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
C. Verifr that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.
E. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly.
F. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring
devices.
G. Verify that openings in access floor are in proper locations.
H. Verifr that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreigl materials from outlet boxes.
ARCON 15095 262726‐ 3 VV!RING DEVICES
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA I and, where applicable,
NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated.
B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA l, including mounting
heights specified in that standard unless otherwise indicated.
C. Coordinate locations ofoutlet boxes provided under Section 260537 as required for installation ofwiring
devices provided under this section.
l. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:
a. Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor.
b. Receptacles: 1 8 inches above finished floor or 6 inches above counter.
2. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain according to
manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds
300 v.
F. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more
than one conductor to wiring device terminals.
G. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 314 nm around screw terminal and tightening
to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that
do not rely on screw-actuated binding.
H. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment
grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
I. For isolated ground receptacles, connect wiring device grounding terminal only to identified branch
circuit isolated equipment grounding conductor. Do not connect grounding terminal to outlet box or
normal branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
J. Provide GFCI receptacles with integral GFCI protection at each location indicated. Do not use
feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices.
K. Install in accordance with NECA 'Standard of Installation."
L. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.
M. Install wall switches with OFF position down.
N. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers.
O. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered
without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized
rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.
P. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or
designated for future use.
a. Install receptacles horizontal with grounding pole on right hand side.
R. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper.
S. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
T. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes andjunction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible
ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets in unfinished spaces.
3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260537 to obtain mounting heights
specified.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
ARCON 15095 262726-4 WIRING DEV:CES
B. Inspect each wiHng device for dalnage and defects.
C.Operate each wall switch,wan dimmer,and fan speed contЮ ller with circuit energized to veH″pЮ per
operation.
D.Operate cach wal s宙 tch宙 th circuit energlzed and ven,proper Operation.
E.Ventt that each receptacに de宙 ce is energized.
F.Test each receptacle to veri,operatiOn and proper polarity.
G. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper trlpping operation according to manufacturer:s instructions.
H. Correct unring deflciencies and replace darnaged or defective wiring devices.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A.Attust de宙 ces and wan口 atesto be nush and Lvd.
3.07 CLEANING
A.Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt,paint,or other fOreign material and restore to match OHginal
factory flnish.
END OF SECr10N 26272`
ARCON 15095 262726… 5 VV:R:NG DEVICES
SECTTON 27100s
STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA - INSIDE-PLANT
PARTI GENERAL
I.O1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Communications system design requirements.
B. Communications pathways.
C. Copper cable and terminations.
D. Communications identification.
E. Data Cabling
I.O2 DEFINITIONS
A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
B. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or
cross-connection.
C. EMI: Electromagneticinterference.
D. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
E. Ladder Rack: A fabricated structure consisting of trruo longitudinal side rails connected by individual
transverse members (rungs).
F. LAN: Local area network.
G. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable
terminates.
H. RCDD: RegisteredCommunications DistributionDesigner.
I. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.03 COODRINATION OF WORK
A. Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit/raceway as required for the structured cabling dishibution
system. This includes all raceway explicitly shown on plans or generically required for a complete,
functional system.
B. Contractor shall furnish and install all specialty backboxes for devices as required for the structured
cabling distribution system. This includes all backboxes explicitly shown on plans or generically
required for a complete, functional system.
C. Contractor shall furnish and install all branch circuits required for the structured cabling distribution
system as specified. This includes all circuits explicitly shown on plans or generically required for a
complete, functional system.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American National Standards Institute/Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries
Alliance (ANSUTIA/EIA) ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.l Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standards Part l: General Requirements, and all associated addenda.
B. ICEA S-90-661 - Category 3,5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables (With or
Without An Overall Shield) For Use in General Purpose and LAN Communications Wiring Systems
Technical Requirements; Insulated Cable Engineers Association;2012. (ANSLIICEA 5-90-661)
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,
Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
D. IAC 180 - Illinois Administrative Code 180.
E. TIA-492AAAB-A - Detail Specification for 50-um Core Diameter/l25-um Cladding Diameter Class Ia
Graded-Index Multimode Optical Fibers; Telecommunications Industry Association; Rev A, 2009.
ARCON 15095
DATA‐INS:DE‐PLANT
271005‐l STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
F. TIA492CAAA - Detail Specification for Class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted Single-Mode Optical Fibers;
Telecommunications Industry Association; 1998 (R 2002).
G. TIA-526-7 - OFSTP-7 - Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant;
Telecommunications Industry Association; 2002.
H. TIA-526-14 - OFSTP-I4 - Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant;
Telecommunications Industry Association; Rev B, 2010.
I. TIA-568-C.l - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard; Telecommunications
Industry Association; Rev C, 2009 (with Addenda; 2012).
J. TIA-568-C.2 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard -Part2: Balanced Twisted
Pair Cabling Components; Telecommunications Industry Association; Rev C, 2009.
K. TIA/EIA-568-B.3 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 3: Optical Fiber
Cabling Components Standard, and Addendum I - Additional Transmission Performance Specifications
for 501125 um Optical Fiber Cables; Rev B, 2000; Addendum l.
L. TIA-569-C - Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces; Telecommunications Industry Association; Rev
C, 2012 (with Addend a 2013).
M. TIA-606-8 - Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure; Telecommunications
Industry Association; Rev B, 2012.
N. T1,4,-607-8 - Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises;
Telecommunications Industry Association; Rev B,2012 (with Addenda; 2013).
O. ANSVJ-STD-607 - Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications; Rev A, 2002.
P. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526 Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Systems, and all associated addenda.
a. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758 Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard, and all
associated addenda.
R. International Standards Organizationllnternational Electrotechnical Commission (ISO/IEC) DIS 11801,
January 6,1994
S. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) X3T9.5 Requirements for UTP at 100 Mbps
T. W 444 - Communications Cables; Cunent Edition, Including All Revisions.
U. W 49'7 - Standard for Protectors for Paired-Conductor Communications Circuits; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
V. EIA-310-D - Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment; Electronic Industries Association;
1992
W. lll- 50, Cabinets and Boxes
X. UL l58l - Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
Y. UL 1863 - Communications-Circuit Accessories; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Z. Work performed should additionally comply with and follow guidelines established in the latest
edition/revision, as of the date of the Contract Documents, of the following publications:
1. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)
2. BICSI Customer-Owned Outside Plant (CO-OSP)
3. American National Standards InstituteA.{ational Electrical Contractors Association/Building
Industry Consulting Service International (ANSINECA/BICSI) 568-2001 Standard for Installing
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
r.O5 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
ARCON 15095 271005‐2 STRUCTURED CABLiNG FOR VOICE AND
DATA‐INSIDE‐PLANT
B.
1. Reviews of submittals are to establish general conformance to design intent and does not waive
contract requirements. Contractor is responsible for dimensions, quantities, mounting accessories,
methods of construction, and compliance with the Contract Documents.
2. Provide separate submittal product data/shop drawings for each fixture, device, and equipment type
clearly indicating the type designation per the Contract Documents and all pertinent options and
accessories. Do not group similar fixture types together on a single cut sheet. Submittals which do
not indicate option data where multiple selections exist will be returned without being reviewed.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product.
1. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
2. Installationmethods.
Shop Drawings: Show compliance with requirements on isometric schematic diagram of network layout,
showing cable routings, telecommunication closets, rack and enclosure layouts and locations, service
entrance, and grounding, prepared and approved by BICSI Registered Communications Distribution
Designer (RCDD).
l. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy ofproposed labeling schedules and identification
plates, in software and format selected by Owner.
2. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.
Evidence of qualifications for installer.
Test Plan: Complete and detailed plan, with list of test equipment, procedures for inspection and testing.
D.
E.
Submit along with product data.
F. Field Test Reports.
G. Project Record Documents: Prepared and approved by BICSI Registered Communications Distribution
Designer (RCDD).
l. Record actual locations of outlet boxes and distribution frames.
2. Show as-installed color coding, pair assignment, polarization, and cross-connect layout.
3. Identify distribution frames and equipment rooms by room number on contract drawings.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: List of all components with part numbers, sources of supply, and
operation and maintenance instructions; include copy ofproject record documents.
1.06 QUALTTY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements ofNFPA 70.
B. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60.
C. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. Engage an
experienced contractor who:
1. Shall be fully capable and experienced in the installation of the communications systems specified,
and have a minimum of five (5) years experience on similar systems.
2. Has BICSI-trained and -certified, or equally qualified and certified, installers and technicians on
staffand assign them to this project. If personnel of Contractor are not BICSI-trained and
-certified, Contractor to submit with bid all necessary credentials and certificates of training for
personnel stafffor evaluation and determination by CPS OTS Sr. Infrastructure Manager that said
credentials and certificates are equal to BICSI standards. The project shall be staffed at all times by
Installers and Technicians who, in the role of lead crafts persons, will be able to provide leadership
and technical resources for the remaining crafts persons on the project.
3. Shall be certified by the manufacturing company(-ies) in all aspects of installation and testing of the
products described within the telecommunications systems specifications. Specifically, those
manufacturer(s) whose components constifute a component of the structured cabling system(s)
installed as part ofthe voice and data transport systems. Said certification is to be such that the
Contractor is able to offer and fully comply with the requirements to provide Owner with an
extended warranty as defined in "System Warranty and Application Assurance" Article of this
Section.
D. InstallerSupervision:
ARCON 15095
DAttA‐ :NS:DE‐PLANT
271005‐3 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VO:CE AND
I . The selected Contractor shall provide a Project Manager to act a single point of contact for all
activities performed under this section. The Project Manager shall be a Registered
Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD). The RCDD shall have a minimum of 3 years
experience in design and installation. The designer must have sufficient experience in this type
project(s) as to be able to lend adequate technical support to the field forces during installation,
during the warranty period and during any extended warranty periods or maintenanco contracts.
The Contractor must attach a resume of the responsible designer to the Contractor's response for
evaluation.
2. The Project Manager, or designee thereof, shall be required to attend project meetings as required
until proj ect closeout/signoff.
3. Should the Project Manager assigned to this project change during the installation, the new Project
Manager assigned must meet all qualifications stated in this section, and must also submit a resume
for review by the Owner.
4. Il in the opinion of the Owner, the Project Manager does not possess adequate qualifications to
support the project, the Owner reseryes the right to require the Contractor to assign a designer
whom, in the Owner's opinion, possesses the necessary skills and experience required of this
project.
Materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
production of the required type of material or equipment for at least five years (unless specifically
exempted by the Owner) and shall be the manufacturer's latest design with published properties.
Source Limitations: Equipment and materials of the same general type shall be of the same manufacture
throughout the project to provide uniform appearance, operation and maintenance.
Equipment and materials shall be without blemish or defect.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in City of Chicago
Electrical Code, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
I. Comply with NFPA 70 for abandoned cabling.
1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in
spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and
humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
Do not deliver or install equipment frames and ladder rack until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet
work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above ceilings is complete.
Receive, handle, and store communications system items and materials at the project site. Materials and
items shall be placed so that they are protected from damage and deterioration.
D. Stage rnaterials in a secure area ofthe proJect site until instanation.
1.08 FIBER OPTIC CABLING DESCRIPTION
A. Optical flber backbone cabHng system shaH provide interconnections be"veen lし 狙)F and the IDF and
Concentrator Enclosures in the telecommunications cabling system structure.Cabling system consists of
backbone cables,intemediate,mechanicJ teminations,and patch cords orjumpers used for
backbone‐to‐equipment connections.
1.09 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPT10N
Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the
communications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the MDF and/or the IDF.
This cabling and its connecting hardware are called "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing
protocols.
l. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.
The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is determined by the communications area serving that
link, as follows:
ARCON 15095
DATA‐INS:DE‐PLANT
E.
F.
G.
H.
A.
B.
C.
B.
271005‐4 STRUCTURED CABL:NG FOR VO:CE AND
I . For horizontal cabling served from a Concentrator Enclosure, the maximum allowable length is 14 I
feet (43 meters).
2. For horizontal cabling served directly from the MDF <or fiom IDF9, the maximum allowable
Iength is 295 feet (90 meters).
a. The maximum allowable lengths do not include an allowance for patch cords
1.10 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in
TIA/EIA-568-C.2, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.
1.I1 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under other requirements of the Contract
Documents.
l. Provide a minimum one (l ) year warranty for all parts and labor provided under this electrical
specifications for all components not covered under the Special Warranty provisions of this Article.
B. The Contractor shall guarantee at the time of the bid that all telecommunications equipment, cabling and
components meet or exceed specifications.
C. Special Warranty: Provide to Owner an Extended System and Application Assurance Warranty covering
product and installation defects for all passive manufactured components of the structured cabling
system(s) installed as part of the voice and data transport systems. Passive components are defined as
those exhibiting no gain or contributing no energy. Warrant to Owner the following:
l. The passive products that comprise the telecommunications structured cabling system will be fiee
from manufacturing defects in material or workmanship under normal and proper use.2. All approved passive cabling products that comprise the structured cabling system exceed the
specification standards and will conform to the performance specifications ofthe associated product
data sheet in effect at the time the product is utilized.
3. The installation will meet, if not exceed, the requirements and the standards for cabling
configurations specified in these standards.
4. The Special Warranty shall provided an application assurance guaranteeing structured cabling
system shall be capable of running a minimum of Gigabit Ethernet (l000Mbs) in the horizontal
channel, and l0-Gigabit Ethernet (10,000Mbs) in the backbone.
5. The Special Warranty shall be applicable to the original site of installation. Under the warranty, the
manufacturer will either repair or replace the defective product itself at the manufacturer's cost, or
the manufacturer will pay an authorized reseller for the cost to repair or replace any such defective
product on behalf of the manufacturer.
6. Transfer manufacturer's warranties to the Owner in addition to the General System Guarantee.
Submit these wananties on each item in list form with shop drawings. Detail specific parts within
equipment that are subject to separate conditional warranty. Warranty proprietary equipment and
systems involved in this contract during the guarantee period. Final payment shall not relieve
Contractor of these obligations.
7. Special Warranty shall be held by the product manufacturer(s).
8. Special Warranty Period: 25 years from date of acceptance.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTURERS
A. CATEGORY 6e UTP CABLE AND CONNECTING HARDWARE (Plenum)
l. Category 6e UTP: Manufacturers of Cable: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following manufacturers:
a. Hubbell Premise Wiring NEXTSPEED Category 6E cable
b. Panduit GenSpeed 6500 Premium Category 6E cable
c. BerkTek Lanmark 2000 Category 6E cable
ARCON 15095
DATA―:NS:DE‐PLAN丁
271005‐5 STRUCttURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
2. Category 6e UTP: Manufacturers of Connecting Hardware and Patch Cords: Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers:
a. Hubbell Premise Wiring NEXTSPEED Category 6 Connectivity
b. Panduit TX6 PLUS Category 6 Connectivity
c. Ortronics Clarity 6 Series Connectivity
d. Ortronics Inc., Clarity6 series components
2.02 SYSTEM DESIGN
A. Provide a complete permanent system of cabling and pathways for voice and data communications,
including cables, conduits and wireways, pull wires, support strucfures, enclosures and cabinets, and
outlets.
l. Comply with TIA-568 (cabling) and TIA-569 (pathways), latest editions (commercial standards).
2. Provide fixed cables and pathways that comply with NFPA 70 and T14-607 and are LIL listed or
third party independent testing laboratory certified.
3. In this project, the term plenum is defined as retum air spaces above ceilings, inside ducts, under
raised floors, and other air-handling spaces.
B. Main Distribution Frame (MDF): Centrally located support structure for terminating horizontal cables
that extend to telecommunications outlets, functioning as point of presence to extemal service provider.
l. Locate main distribution frame as indicated on the drawings.
2. Capacity: As required to terminate all cables required by design criteria plus minimum 25 percent
spare space.
C. Intermediate Distribution Frames (IDF): Support sfuctures for terminating horizontal cables that extend
to telecommunications outlets.
l. Locate intermediate distribution frames as indicated on the drawings.
D. Backbone Cabling: Cabling, pathways, and terminal hardware connecting intermediate distribution
frames (IDF's) with main distribution frame (MDF), wired in star topology with main distribution frame
at center hub of star.
E. Cabling to Outlets: Specified horizontal cabling, wired in star topology to distribution frame located at
center hub ofstar; also referred to as "links".
2.03 PATHWAYS
A. Conduit: As specified in Section 260534; provide pull cords in all conduit.
B. Underground Service Entrance: Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit, Schedule 40.
2,04 COPPER CABLE AND TER]\{INATIONS
A. Data Cabling
l. Horizontal Data
a. Cable
l) Copper Horizontal Cable: TIA/EIA-568 Category 6 solid conductor unshielded rwisted
pair (UTP), 24 AWG, 100 ohm; 4 individually twisted pairs; covered with blue jacket
and complying with all relevant parts of and addenda to latest edition of TIA/EIA-568
andUL 444.
(a) Provide NFPA 70 type CMP plenum-rated cable.
b. Jacks and Connectors
l) RI-45, non-keyed, terminated with 110-style insulation displacement connectors; high
impact thermoplastic housing; complying with same standard as specified horizontal
cable and LrL 1863.
(a) Color: Blue
(l) Color: Fronl face ofjack shall be colored. Use ofa color-coded icon insert on
a neutral-colorjack shall not be acceptable.
(b) Performance: 500 mating cycles.
(c) Data Jacks: 4-pair, pre-wired to T568A configuration, with color-coded indications
for T5688 configuration.
ARCON 15095 271005-6 STRUCTUREDCABLING FORVO]CEAND
DATA. INSIDE-PI.ANT
B. Category 6 UTP: Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables terminated with eight-position modular
plug at each end.
l. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6
performance.
a. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.
b. Jack Modules shall comply with TIAIEIA-568-C.2.
2. Patch Cord plug modules shall comply with ANSI/TIA-968-A requirements. Patch cords shall be of
same manufacturer and consistent with components and performance level of crossJisted solutions
indicated in this Article.
3. Color: Coordinate with UTP cable color per system application.
4. Quantity to be provided:
a. Work Area: Provide one (l) 6-ft patch cord for each Category 6 UTP outlet installed per
system application.
b. Equipment End:
l) Data Racks:
(a) Provide (1 ) 5-ft patch cord for one-half(fifty-percent) ofthe total number of
Category 6 UTP outlets installed per system application.
(b) Provide (l) 7-ft patch cord for one-half(fifty-percent) ofthe total numberof
Category 6 UTP outlets installed per system application.
5. Delivery & Turn-over: Notify District Sr. Infrastructure Manager when patch cords have been
delivered to project site. Deliver patch cords to site at least one week prior to substantial
completion and store in locked, secure MDF room, or other locked, secure room as coordinated
with Owner, until turn-over to district information technology manager personnel. Contractor is
responsible for all patch cords until direct turn-over to district information technology manager.
2.05 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Comply with TIA-606.
2.06 CROSS-CONNECTION EQUIPMENT
A. Patch Panels for Copper Cabling: Sized to fit EIA standard 19 inch wide equipment racks; 0.09 inch
thick aluminum; cabling terminated on Type I l0 insulation displacement connectors; printed circuit
board interface.
l. Jacks: Non-keyed RJ-45, suitable for and complying with same standard as cable to be terminated;
maximum 48 ports per standard width panel.
a. Category rating to match category ofspecifiedjack (see horizontal cabling).
b. Jack color shall match the color ofspecified userjack (see horizontal cabling).
2. Capacity: Provide ports suffrcient for cables to be terminated plus 25 percent spare.
3. Labels: Factory installed laminated plastic nameplates above each port, numbered consecutively;
comply with TIA/EIA-606 using encoded identifiers.
4. Provide incoming cable strain relief and routing guides on back of panel.
5. Provide full height (min 2U) patch cord organizers for each patch panel
a. Minimum 2U height
b. Panel material: l6 ga cold-rolled stee
c. cover mateiral: 16 ga cold-rolled steel
d. Ring: 0.225" diamter steel road
e. Black power coat
f. Front and rear rings
g. Front and rear cover
6. Patch Cords: Provide one patch cord for patch panel port.
2.07 LABEL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following
manufacturers:
l. Brady Corporation
ARCON 15095 271005 -7 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
DATA - INSIDE-PI.ANT
2. 3M
3, Panduit Corporation
B. Cable/wire markers shall be self adhesive, self laminating mechanically printed with a clear protective
laminating over wrap or protective heat-shLrink tubing.
C. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating
adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
PART3 EXECUTION
3.OT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Receive, handle, and store communications system items and materials at the project site. Materials and
items shall be placed so that they are protected from damage and deterioration.
B. Stage materials in a secure area of the project site until installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. The drawings for work under telecommunications specification sections related to communication
systems are diagrammatic and are intended to convey the scope of work and indicate the general
arangement of outlets, equipment, termination hardware, fixhrres and other work included in the
Contract.
B. Location of items required by the drawings or specifications not definitely fixed by dimensions are
approximate only and exact locations necessary to secure the best conditions and results shall be
determined at the site and shall be subject to the approval of the Owner.
C. Follow drawings in laying out work, check drawings of other trades to veri$ spaces in which work will
be installed, and maintain maximum headroom and space conditions at all points.
l. Where headroom or space conditions appear inadequate, the Owner shall be notified before
proceeding with installation.
2. Minor rerouting and changes in location shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. Coordinate the mounting heights of communications equipment and raceways to clear the opening
heights ofdoors and the heights ofequipment which needs to be removed and replaced.
4. As necessary, adjust elevations of rack-mounted termination hardware and horizontal wire
management panels so as to compensate for rack unit sizes of actual hardware used, as compared to
hardware rack unit sizes depicted in Contract Drawings.
D. Perform all work with skilled mechanics of the particular trade involved in a neat and workmanlike
manner.
E. Perform all work in cooperation and coordination with other trades and schedule.
F. Furnish other trades advance information on locations and sizes offrames, boxes, sleeves and openings
needed for the work, routes for conduit, and also furnish information and shop drawings necessary to
permit trades affected to install their work properly and without delay.
G. Where there is evidence that work of one trade will interfere with the work of other trades, all trades shall
assist in working out space allocations to make satisfactory adjustments and shall be prepared to submit
and revise coordinated shop drawings.
H. With the approval of the Owner and without additional cost to the Owner, make minor modifications in
the work as required by structural interferences, by interferences with work ofother trades or for proper
execution of the work.
I. Work installed before coordinating with other trades so as to cause interference with the work of such
other trades shall be changed to correct such condition without additional cost to the Owner and as
directed by the Owner.
J. Minor changes in the locations of outlets, fixtures and equipment shall be made prior to rough in at the
direction of the Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner.
K. Contractor shall cooperate with other trades and coordinate work so that conflicts with other work are
eliminated.
ARCON 15095 271005 - 8 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
DATA - INSIDE.PI.ANT
L. Equipment shall be installed with adequate space allowed for removal, repair or changes to equipment.
Ready accessibility to removable parts of equipment and to wiring shall be provided without moving
other equipment which is to be installed or which is in place. Contractor shall verify measurements.
Discrepancies shall be brought to the Owner's attention for interpretation.
M. Determine temporary openings in the buildings that will be required for the admission of apparatus
furnished under this Division, and notifu the Owner accordingly. In the event of failure to give sufficient
notice in time to arrange for these openings during construction, assume all costs of providing such
openings thereafter.
N. Location of communication outlets and raceway pathways are approximate and exact locations shall be
determined on site.
O. Contractor shall refer to contract documents for details, reflected ceiling plans, and large scale drawings.
P. Comply with Communication Service Provider requirements.
a. Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with T14-607 and NFPA 70.
R. INSTALLATION OF CABLES
1. ComplywithNECA 1.
2. General Requirements for Cabling:
a. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2.
b. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."
c. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
d. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only
at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.
e. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables not more than 6 inches from cabinets,
boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. Do not over-cinch or crush cables.
f. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending
cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
C. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii, but not less than 4X cable diameter. Install lacing bars and
distribution spools.
h. Hook and loop (Velcro)-style cable ties shall be used to bundle and secure exposed cables in
MDF/IDF rooms. Use of plastic cable ties is not permitted.
i. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during
installation and replace it with new cable.
j. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps
shall not be used for heating.
k. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM,Ch.4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull
tensions, and do not exceed manufacfurer's recommended cable pull tension.
I ) When installing in conduit, use only lubricant approved by cable manufacturer and do
not chafe or damage outerjacket.
l. Service Loops: Provide the following minimum extra length of cable, dressed and routed
neatly:
1) At MDF/IDF frames: 60 inches, neatly installed in vertical wire manager or
accommodated by additional routing around overhead ladder rack runway.
2) At Surface Raceway Outlets - Copper: 12 inches, neatly installed in surface raceway
channel.
3. UTP Cable Installation:
a. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2.
b. Maintain pair twists as close as possible to point of termination, but do not untwist UTP cables
more than 1/8 (.125) inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.
c. Concentrator Enclosures: No cabling is to be routed down through the center area ofthe
enclosure so as to inhibit the installation ofnetwork electronics.
ARCON 15095 271005 -9 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
DATA - INSIDE-PLANT
d, MDF/IDF: Install and route cabling on overhead ladder rack runway and within horizontal and
vertical cable guides to terminating hardware.
4. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
5. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:
a. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.3.
b. Cables shall terminate with LC-type connectors secured in connecting hardware that is rack or
enclosure mounted.
c. Concentrator Enclosures: No cabling is to be routed down through the center area ofthe
enclosure so as to inhibit the installation of nefwork electronics.
d. MDF/IDF: Install and route cabling on overhead ladder rack runway and within horizontal and
vertical cable guides to terminating hardware.
6. Separation from EMI Sources:
a, Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIAiEIA-569-A for separating unshielded copper voice and
data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and
equipment.
b. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and
unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
l) Elechical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.
2) Elechical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.
3) Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.
c. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded
power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
l) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-ll2 inches.
2) Electrical Equipment Rating befween 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.
3) Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.
d. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines
and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as
follows:
l) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
2) Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches.
3) Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.
e. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA
or FIP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.
f. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5
inches.
S. INSTALLATION OF CABINET RACKS AND ENCLOSURES
l. ComplywithNECA 1.
2. Install all communicalions hardware components in accordance with project specifications and plan,
elevation, and layout information within Contract Drawings.
3. The contractor shall coordinate the installation of communications cabinets, racks and enclosures
with the installation of the communications pathways and cabling to eliminate any potential damage
to cables, or any other installed communications components or equipment.
4. Backboards: Install plywood with "A" side outward and at elevation and wall location(s) as
indicated in Conhact Drawings. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners.
Cover fire-rating mark during painting. Remove cover afterwards, leaving mark exposed for
subsequent inspection by authority having jurisdiction.
5. Communications Floor-mounted Racks: Assemble and install in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations. Racks shall be assembled such that mounting rails are exactly
perpendicular to the base.
a. Secure to floor utilizing lag bolts or masonry anchors, and washers, appropriate to application
and flooring condition. The use of a Tapcon, or equal, masonry screw with washer is not
acceptable. Secure at all four locations of rack base.
ARCON 15095 271005‐10 STRUCTURED CABL:NG FOR VOICE AND
DATA―INSIDE‐PLANT
b. Secure each communications floor-mounted rack to overhead ladder rack using
eack-to-runway mounting plates, brackets, j-bolts, nuts/washers, etc., installed in compliance
with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
6. Wire management panels: Secure to communication relay racks in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.03 PATHWAYEXAMINATION
A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables.
1. Verifr proposed routes ofpathways. Check raceways, ladder racks, and other elements for
compliance with space allocations, clearances, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation,
and other conditions affecting installation. Verifu that cabling can be installed complying with EMI
clearance requirements.
2. Prepare wall penetrations and veri$ that penetrations of rated fire walls are made using products
labeled for type of wall penetrated.
3. Identifr plan to support cables and raceways in suspended ceilings. Verift weight of individual
types and sizes of cables. Verify that load capacity of cable support structures is adequate for each
pathway.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.04 TNSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A. Underground Service Entrance: Install conduit at least l8 inches below finish grade; encase in at least 3
inches thick concrete for at least 60 inches out from the building line.
B. Install pathways with the following minimum clearances:
l. 48 inches from motors, generators, frequency converters, transformers, x-ray equipment, and
unintemrptible power systems.
2. 12 inches from power conduits and cables and panelboards.
3. 5 inches from fluorescent and high frequency lighting fixtures.
4. 6 inches from flues, hot water pipes, and steam pipes.
C. Conduit, in Addition to Requirements of Section 260534:
D. Conduit:
l. Do not install more than 2 (two) 90 degree bends in a single horizontal cable run.
2. Leave pull cords in place where cables are not initially installed.
3. Conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceilings, and floors except where
specifically indicated to be exposed.
a. Conduit may remain exposed to view in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and
telecommunications rooms.
b. Treat conduit in crawl spaces and under floor slabs as ifexposed to view.
c. Where exposed to view, install parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural
members.
d. Under floor slabs, locate conduit at 12 inches, minimum, below vapor retarder; seal
penetrations of vapor retarder around conduit.
E. Cable Routing
l. All cabling to re routed within approved raceway or above lay-in ceiling. Cabling shall be hidden
by ceiling or raceway in all locations of the building with the exception of IDF and MDF rooms or
as otherwise noted on the drawings.
a. Where cable tray is provided, route cabling within cable tray.
b. Where conduit sleeve is provided, route cabling within conduit sleeve
c. Above lay-in ceilings, where cable tray or conduit sleeves are not available:
l) Where raceway for cabling is not provided, Contractor shall run cabling through Erico
Cablecat 2" J hooks.
(a) J hooks shall be directly attached to building structure at a maximum of 4'-0"
center-to-center.
ARCON 15095 271005‐1l SttRUCTURED CABLING FOR VO:CE AND
DAttA¨ INS:DE‐PLANT
(b) Additional J hooks will be added as necessary to limit the maximum cable catenary
(cable sag) to 12" maximum.
(c) Install tye-wraps around all J hooks upon completion of cable pulls.
(d) J hook cable density shall not exceed 60% ofthe maximum cable count suggested
by manufacture. If necessary, provide additional level of J hooks for high cable
density runs.
(e) Contractor shall provide all mounting hardware (threaded rod, unistrut, etc.)
Necessary to solidly mounted, complete cable raceway system.
3.05 FIRESTOPPING
A. Utilize an approved firestop assembly to seal all cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and
wall assemblies. Assembly must achieve the same smoke/fire-resistance rating as the floor or wall being
penetrated.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
C. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."
D. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
3.06 GROUNDING
A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.
B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
C. Coordinate location of communications grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors.
D. Bond metallic equipment to the communications grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG
equipment grounding conductor.
E. Bond each segment of ladder rack runway using bonding straps. Ladder rack connection fittings are not
considered an acceptable bonding mechanism. Install bonding straps in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
F. Bond metallic equipment to the communications grounding bus bar in MDF [or IDF], using not smaller
than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.
1. Ground ladder rack system to communications grounding bus bar.
2. Ground each floor-mounted rack to communications grounding bus bar. Bonding to overhead
ladder rack is not a permissible.
3. Ground each concentrator enclosure to communications grounding bus bar. At enclosure, terminate
equipment grounding conductor to grounding bus bar located within enclosure.
G. ESD Port Kit: Install ESD port kit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations,
on communications mounting elements as follows:
1. Floor-mounted racks: Mount a kit directly to both the front and the rear sides of the right vertical
mounting rail of the center most rack in MDF [and the center most rack in IDF], at 48" above floor,
using thread-forming screw and antioxidant compound. Coordinate exact location with Owner.
3.07 IDENTIFICATION
A. All labeing standards will be determined in conjuction with the district information technology
adminisffator. The district technolory administrator shall have final approval on all labeling schemes.
Labeling schemes applied without approval shall be replaced/modified to comply.
B. Labeling shall minimually comply with EIA/TIA labeling standards.
C. LABELING HIERARCHY
1. When labeling communications cabling and pathways always begin the labeling scheme with the
room or location ofgreater significance.
2. Consult with district Sr. Infrastructure Manager for clarifications regarding application of hierarchy
table to the project. Hierarchy relationships that must be adhered to include, but are not limited to:
a. Cabling and/or pathways between the MDF and any IDFs must list the MDF first.
b. Cabling and/or pathways between a concentrator enclosure and the work area must list the
concentrator enclosures first.
ARCON 15095 271005 - 12 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
DATA - INSIDE-PI.ANT
c. Cabling and/or pathways between an MDF or IDF and a wireless access point outlet must list
the MDF or IDF first.
3. Labeling must be the same on both ends of the cable and/or pathway.
4. Labeling for all communications infrastructure elements shall be consistent across the installation.
Coordinate with requirements for labels and identification defined in Contract Drawings.
D. WIRE IDENTIFICATION
1. Cable/wire markers shall be installed within four (4) inches of each end of the cable, and where
cable is accessible in junction or pull boxes. Information list on cable/wire marker shall include,
but is not limited to:
a. Cable and type
b. Terminationhardware
c. Terminationposition
2. Identification within Connector Fields in MDF, [IDFs,] and concentrator enclosures: Label each
connector and each discrete unit ofcable-terminating and connecting hardware.
E. WORKSTATIONLABELING
l. Administration at the work area / workstation will be carried out in proximity to the closest
Distribution Frame (MDF, DF).
2. The administration of the individual Data./Voice locations will reference the MDF or ID room
location.
3. Adminishation of the individual jack locations will be used for local tracking or tracing of the patch
panel termination points (DatalVoice jacks back to the closest termination in the Distribution
Frame). Typical numbering of the jack locations will begin with the termination point closest to the
Distribution Frame and continuing in numerical series outward from that location.
3.08 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit
communications systems installation, including all pathway elements and supports necessary for same.
Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved. Perform work so as to not impair structural
stability of building construction and systems.
B. Conduits passing through roofs or other surfaces exposed to weather shall be properly flashed as
specified in roofing and waterproofing sections. This flashing work shall be part of this division of work.
C. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces.
Install new firestopping where existing firestopping has been disturbed during the course of install.
Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
3.09 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section
"Painting."
1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the
degree ofdamage at each location.
2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and
application of successive coats.
3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
3.10 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation inspect exposed finishes. Remove buns, dirt, paint spots, and construction
debris. Repair damaged finish(es), including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B. All equipment, hardware and finishes shall be cleaned prior to final acceptance. Unless otherwise
indicated, clean shall mean free of dust, dirt, mud, debris, oil, grease, residues, and contamination.
C. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets
are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Protect conduit and wireway
ARCON 15095 271005 - 13 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
DATA - INSIDE.PI.ANT
openings against the entrance of foreign matter by means of plugs or caps. Cover fixtures, materials,
equipment and devices fumished or installed under this section or otherwise protect against damage, both
before and after installation. Hardware, materials, equipment, or devices damaged prior to final
acceptance ofthe work shall be restored to their original condition or replaced.
D. During the course of communications installation work, provide for on-going proper disposal of all
debris, including but not limited to: equipment packaging and shipping materials, shipping pallets, empty
cable reels/boxes, cable cuttings, etc. The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the site free from
accumulations of waste material or rubbish caused by its employees or work. Remove all crates, cartons,
and other waste materials or trash from the working areas at the end of each working day. Flammable
waste material must be removed from the working areas at the time of generation. All rubbish and debris,
combustible or not, shall be discarded in covered metal containers daily and removed from the premises
at least weekly and legally disposed of.
3.11 COMMISSIONING AND DEMONSTRATION
A. INSPECTION
l. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings.
Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding
for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.l .
2. Visually confirm Category 6 marking of outlets, outlet/connectors, and patch panels for horizontal
UTP cabling for Data/Wireless, Kronos and MMTV applications.
3. Visually confirm Category 5e marking of outlets, outlet/connectors, termination blocks and patch
panels for horizontal UTP cabling voice and 25-pair Category 5e backbone applications.
4. Visually confirm Category 3 marking of copper backbone UTP cables for indoor voice backbone
applications.
5. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch
cords, and labeling ofall components.
6. Inspect cable terminations for color coded labels ofproper type.
B. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
l. Perform tests and inspections.
2. Copper UTP Cable Tests:
a. Copper UTP Test Instruments:
1) Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIAIEIA-568-B.2.
Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test
Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in
"Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are
qualified by test equipment manufacturer for permanent link test configuration.
2) For horizontal UTP cable certification tests, use a Level III tester.
b. Copper Backbone UTP Cable Tests:
1) Test copper backbone UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent
faults, polarity between conductors, and for insertion loss (attenuation). Test operation
of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not
cross-connection.
c. UTP Performance Tests:
l) Test permanent link for each outlet. Perform the following tests according to
TIA/EIA-5 68-B. I and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 :
(a) Wire map.
(b) Lengh (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements).
(c) Insertion loss.
(d) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss.
(e) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss.
(0 Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT).
(g) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT).
(h) Return loss.
ARCON 15095 271005 - 14 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
DATA - INSIDE-PI.ANT
(i) Propagation delay.
0) Delay skew.
2) Testing for Category 6 horizontal UTP must additionally report values for
attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio (ACR), and power sum attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio
(PSACR).
3) A star ("*") passing shall not be considered acceptable.
3. Optical Fiber Cable Tests:
a. Optical Fiber Test Instruments:
1) Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Use
only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for
channel or link test configuration.
b. Optical Time Domain Reflectometry Tests: After terminating optical fiber cables, one
individual fiber from each backbone cable installed shall be tested using an optical time
domain reflectometer (OTDR). Perform OTDR testing in accordance with manufacturer's
recommended test procedures. Test to determine the installed length, continuity, and
OTDR-based attenuation measurement. Provide test report identifying backbone cable
identification and indicating corresponding values from tests.
c. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests: Perform optical fiber end-to-end link tests according to
TIA/EIA-568-B. I and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.
1) Multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in both directions
according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper.
2) Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in
TIA/EIA-s68.8.I.
3) These readings must not be higher than the "Optimal Attenuation Loss (OAL)". The
OAL will be calculated using the manufacturer's factory certified test results, (db/km)
adjusted for the actual installed lengths (dBs) plus the manufacturer's best published
attenuation losses for the connector on this project and/or splice installed on this project
(0.25dB for Connectors and 0.1OdB for splices).
4) Link End-to-End Attenuation Test reports shall include:
(a) Cable identification and Strand numbers
(b) The OAL value for each link
(c) The theoretical maximum attenuation value, per TIA/EIA-568-B.1, for each link
(d) Tested values for attenuation
4. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that
is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the
computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
5. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective ifit does not pass tests and inspections. Correct
failures and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new components
and retest to demonstration compliance with requirements.
6. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 27IOO5
ARCON 15095 271005‐15 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND
DATA¨:NS!DE‐PLANT
ATTACⅡMENT C
ⅥLLAGE OF OAK BR00K
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROЛ CT
ATTACHM[ENT C
LIST OF DRAWINGS
SHEET NOS.SHEET TITLES
GO。l Cover Sheet
AO。l Delnolition Plans
Al.l Partial Floor Plan,Ceiling Plan and Finish Floor Plan
A2.l Schedule&Details
El.l Electncal Plan&Schedule
DATE LAST
REVISED
May 25,2018
May 25,2018
May 25,2018
May 25,2018
May 25,2018
ⅥLLAGE OF OAK BR00K
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROECT
ATTACHMENT D
SPECIAL PROJECT REOUIREMENTS
l. Contractor shall have five (5) years of experience which is comparable in type and scope to
this project.
2. Work hours are 7:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. Monday through Friday. Any deviation is subject to
the approval of the Village representative.
3. The project will be done on consecutive work days, excluding weekends and holidays
observed by the Village, until completed, delays only to inclement weather.
4. Contractor is required to obtain all necessary permits from the Village of Oak Brook, and
schedule required inspections through Community Development.
5. The Contractor shall supply to the Village, phone numbers where he/she can be reached
after normal working hours.
6. The Contractor must submit all manufacturers' literature on all materials that will be used
on this project, including M.S.D.S. (Material Safety Data Sheets) prior to any work
beginning.
7. A storage location for supplies, ladders and scaffolding shall be mutually agreed upon
between the Village and the contractor before any material is stored on site. The Contractor
must deliver material with manufacturers labels intact and legible, store material on raised
platforms and cover material with protective covering.
8. Before work is started, Contractor must deliver to the job site sufficient material to complete
the project.
9. If a dumpster is required, the location of the dumpster placement shall be mutually agreed
upon between the Village and the contractor.
10. All ladders and scaffolding shall be maintained in prior working order during the course of
this project and shall be secured at the end of each workday.
1 1. Contractor must provide barricades to ensure that falling debris will not injure anyone, and
to prevent public access to the work area at all times. Yellow "CAUTION" tape will be
placed below the immediate work areas of laborers and scaffolds to wam the public of
people working overhead.
ATTACHMENT D
12. At all times, Contractor must keep the work and storage areas in a clean, orderly, and a
picked up manner, to prevent debris from blowing. Clean adjoining streets and immediate
vicinity at the end of each work day. Sidewalks, windowsills, roofs and other work areas
will be broom swept to remove all debris. Daily material and debris not placed into dumpster
will be removed from the site.
13. Upon completion of the project the work area shall be cleaned. All debris and remaining
material and supplies shall be removed from the jobsite, including the dumpster within 72
hours of completion.
14. Upon completion the Contractor shall supply a one year warranty covering material and
workmanship; contractor shall submit sample warranty with bid.
VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K
FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00ⅣI RENOVATION PROJECT
APPENDIX l
PREVAILING WAGES
Prevailing lrvage rates for
DuPage County effective
Sept. 1, 2017
Trade Title Region Type Class Base
Wage
ASBESTOS ABT―GEN ALL
ASBESTOS ABT―MEC ALL
BOILERMAKER ALL
BRICK MASON ALL
CARPENTER ALL
CEMENT MASON ALL
CERAMIC TILE FNSHER ALL
COMMUNICAT10N TECH ALL
ELECTRIC PWR EQMT OP ALL
ELECTRIC PWR EQMT OP ALL
ELECTRIC PWR GRNDMAN ALL
ELECTRIC PWR GRNDMAN ALL
ELECTRIC PVVR LINEMAN ALL
ELECTRIC PWR LINEMAN ALL
ELECTRIC PVVR TRK DRV ALL
ELECTR:C PWR TRK DRV ALL
ELECTRICIAN ALL
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR ALL
FENCE ERECTOR NE
FENCE ERECTOR W
GLAZIER ALL
HT/FROSTINSULATOR ALL
IRON WORKER E
IRON VVORKER W
LABORER ALL
ALL
BLD
BLD
BLD
ALL
ALL
BLD
BLD
ALL
HヽW
ALL
HⅥⅣ
ALL
HWγ
ALL
HVVY
BLD
BLD
ALL
ALL
BLD
BLD
ALL
ALL
ALL
15
152
15
152
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
152
152
15
1522
15
15
152
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
152
152
15
1522
15
1465
1162
697
1045
1179
1400
‐
‐
500
550
500
550
500
550
500
550
1235
1443
1340
1052
1404
1212
1415
1152
1465
M‐F OSA OSH H/W
OT
Pension Vacation Training
000
000
000
000
000
000
038
073
029
066
045
088
030
059
068
090
040
070
094
072
035
081
050
LATHER
MACHINIST
MARBLE FINISHERS
MARBLE MASON
MATERIAL TESTER I
MATERIALS TESTER II
M!LLWR:GHT
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERAT:NG ENGINEER
OPERAT:NG ENGINEER
OPERAT:NG ENGINEER
OPERAT:NG ENG!NEER
OPERATING ENG:NEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERATING ENGINEER
OPERAT:NG ENG:NEER
ORNAMNTLIRON
VVORKER
ORNAMNTLiRON
WORKER
PAINTER
PAINTER SIGNS
PILEDRIVER
PIPEFITTER
PLASTERER
PLUMBER
ALL
BLD
ALL
BLD
ALL
ALL
ALL
BLD l
BLD 2
BLD 3
BLD 4
BLD 5
BLD 6
BLD 7
FLT
H町 1
HⅥ″ 2
HVW 3
Hヽ W 4
HⅥγ 5
HⅥ辞 6
HWY 7
ALL
ALL
ALL
BLD
ALL
BLD
BLD
BLD
‐
3395
4909
3120
3620
4835
5410
5410
5410
5410
5410
5410
5410
3800
5230
5230
5230
5230
5230
5230
5230
4925
4866
4618
4205
48135
5050
4531
5220
■
1045
1045
1465
1465
1179
1880
1880
1880
1880
1880
1880
1880
1805
1880
1880
1880
1880
1880
1880
1880
1390
1887
895
1552
1628
1232
1232
1887
1435
1435
1435
1435
1435
1435
1435
1360
1435
1435
1435
1435
1435
1435
1435
1979
2076
820
318
1887
1785
1571
1335
15
15
15
15
15
15
152222222
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
1522 15
15
15
15
15
15
152222222
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
1522
15
15
15
15
15
15
000
185
000
000
000
000
000
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
190
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
059
050
050
063
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
075
070
15
15
15
15
15
15
1522222
R00FER
SHEETMETAL WORKER
SPR:NKLER F11■ER
STEEL ERECTOR
STEEL ERECTOR
STONE MASON
TERRAZZO FINISHER
TERRAZZO MASON
TlLE MASON
TRAFFIC SAFETY WRKR
TRUCK DRIVER
TRUCK DRIVER
TRUCK DRIVER
TRUCK DRIVER
TUCKPOINTER
Legend
M-F OT Unless otherwise noted, OT pay is required for any hour greater than 8 worked each day, Mon through Fri. The number listed is the
multiple of the base wage.
OSA Overtime pay required for every hour worked on Saturdays
OSH Overtime pay required for every hour worked on Sundays and Holidays
H/W Health/Welfare benefit
Explanations DUPAGE couNTY
tRoN WoRKERS AND FENCE ERECTOR (WEST) - West of Route 53.
The following list is considered as those days for which holiday rates of wages for work performed apply: New Years Day, Memorial Day, Fourth
ofJuly, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, christmas Day and Veterans Day in some classifications/counties. Generally, any ofthese holidays which
fall on a Sunday is celebrated on the following Monday. This then makes work performed on that Monday payable at the appropriate overtime
rate for holiday pay. Common practice in a given local may alter certain days of celebration. lf in doubt, please check with IDOL.
ALL
ALL
ALLEW
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
4230
4577
4720
4207
4506
4538
4530
4777
4920
4407
4866
4992
4054
4788
‐
3510
3685
3685
3685
3685
4517
15
15
1522
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
908
1065
1225
1345
1052
1045
1065
1065
‐
810
810
810
810
810
1045
1214
1410
1155
1959
2076
1668
1276
1415
‐
762
976
976
976
976
1504
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
BLD
BLD
BLD
ALL
ALL
BLD
BLD
BLD
BLD
HW
ALL l
ALL 2
ALL 3
ALL 4
BLD
3630
3645
3665
3685
4417
15
15
1522
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15222222222222222
EXPLANATION OF CLASSES
ASBESTOS - GENERAL - removal of asbestos material/mold and hazardous materials from any place in a building, including mechanical systems
where those mechanical systems are to be removed. This includes the removal of asbestos materials/mold and hazardous materials from
ductwork or pipes in a building when the building is to be demolished at the time or at some close future date.
ASBESTOS - MECHANICAL - removal of asbestos material from mechanical systems, such as pipes, ducts, and boilers, where the mechanical
systems are to remain.
TRAFFIC SAFETY - work associated with barricades, horses and drums used to reduce lane usage on highway work, the installation and removal
of temporary lane markings, and the installation and removal oftemporary road signs.
CERAMIC TILE FINISHER
The grouting, cleaning, and polishing of all classes of tile, whether for interior or exterior purposes, all burned, glazed or unglazed products; all
composition materials, granite tiles, warning detectable tiles, cement tiles, epory composite materials, pavers, glass, mosaics, fiberglass, and all
substitute materials, for tile made in tile-like units; all mixtures in tile like form of cement, metals, and other materials that are for and intended
for use as a finished floor surface, stair treads, promenade roofs, walks, walls, ceilings, swimming pools, and all other places where tile is to form
a finished interior or exterior. The mixing of all setting mortars including but not limited to thin-set mortars, epoxies, wall mud, and any other
sand and cement mixtures or adhesives when used in the preparation, installation, repair, or maintenance of tile and/or similar materials. The
handling and unloading of all sand, cement, lime, tile, fixtures, equipment, adhesives, or any other materials to be used in the preparation,
installation, repair, ormaintenanceof tile and/or similar materials. CeramicTile Finishers shallfill alljoints andvoids regardless of method on all
tile work, particularly and especially after installation of saidtilework. Application of anyandall protective coverings to alltypes oftile
installations including, but not be limited to, allsoap compounds, paper products, tapes, and all polyethylene coverings, plywood, masonite,
cardboard, and any new type of products that may be used to protect tile installations, Blastrac equipment, and all floor scarifying equipment
used in preparing floors to receive tile. The clean up and removal of all waste and materials. All demolition of existing tile floors and walls to be
re-tiled.
COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN
Low voltage installation, maintenance and removal of telecommunication facilities (voice, sound, data and video) including telephone and data
inside wire, interconnect, terminal equipment, centraloffices, PABX, fiber optic cable and equipment, micro waves, V-SAT, bypass, CAW, WAN
(wide area networks), LAN (local area networks), and ISDN (integrated system digital network), pulling of wire in raceways, but not the
installation of raceways.
MARBLE FINISHER
Loading and u nloading trucks, distribution of all materials (all stone, sand, etc.), stockinB of floors with material, performing all rigging for heavy
work, the handling of all material that may be needed for the installation of such materials, building of scaffolding, polishing if needed, patching,
waxing of material if damaged, pointing up, caulking, grouting and cleaning of marble, holding water on diamond or Carborundum blade or saw
for setters cutting, use of tub saw or any other saw needed for preparation of material, drilling of holes for wires that anchor material set by
setters, mixing up of molding plaster for installation of material, mixing up thin set for the installation of material, mixing up of sand to cement
for the installation of material and such other work as may be required in helping a Marble setter in the handling of all material in the erection
or installation of interior marble, slate, travertine, art marble, serpentine, alberene stone, blue stone, granite and other stones (meaning as to
stone any foreign or domestic materials as are specified and used in building interiors and exteriors and customarily known as stone in the
trade), carrara, sanionyx, vitrolite and similar opaque glass and the laying of all marble tile, terrazzo tile, slate tile and precast tile, steps, risers
treads, base, or any other materials that may be used as substitutes for any of the aforementioned materials and which are used on interior and
exterior which are installed in a similar manner.
MATERIAt TESTER l: Hand coring and drilling for testing of materials; field inspection of uncured concrete and asphalt.
MATERIAL TESTER ll: Field inspection of welds, structural steel, fireproofing, masonry, soil, facade, reinforcing steel, formwork, cured concrete,
and concrete and asphalt batch plants; adjusting proportions of bituminous mixtures.
OPERATING ENGINEER - BUITDING
Class 1. Asphalt Plant; Asphalt Spreader; Autograde; Backhoes with Caisson Attachment; Batch Plant; Benoto (requires Two Engineers); Boiler
and Throttle Valve; Caisson Rigs; Central Redi-Mix Plant; Combination Back Hoe Front End-loader Machine; Compressor and Throttle Valve;
Concrete Breaker (Truck Mounted); Concrete Conveyor; Concrete Conveyor (Truck Mounted); Concrete Paver Over 27E cu. ft; Concrete Paver
27E cu. ft. and Under: Concrete Placer; Concrete Placing Boom; Concrete Pump (Truck Mounted); Concrete Tower; Cranes, All; Cranes,
Hammerhead; Cranes, (GCl and similar Type); Creter Crane; Spider Crane; Crusher, Stone, etc.; Derrick, All; Derricks, Traveling; Formless Curb
and Gutter Machine; Grader, Elevating; Grouting Machines; Heavy Duty self-Propelled Transporter or Prime Mover; Highlift Shovels or Front
Endloader 2-1/4 yd. and over; Hoists, Elevators, outside type rack and pinion and similar machines; Hoists, One, Two and Three Drum; Hoists,
Two Tugger One Floor; Hydraulic Backhoes; Hydraulic Boom Trucks; Hydro Vac (and similar equipment); Locomotives, All; Motor Patrol;
Lubrication Technician; Manipulators; Pile Drivers and Skid Rig; Post Hole Digger; Pre-Stress Machine; Pump Cretes Dual Ram; Pump Cretes:
Squeeze Cretes-Screw Type Pumps; Gypsum Bulker and Pump; Raised and Blind Hole Drill; Roto Mill Grinder; Scoops - Tractor Drawn; Slip-Form
Paver; Straddle Buggies; Operation of Tie Back Machine; Tournapull; Tractor with Boom and Side Boom; Trenching Machines.
Class 2. Boilers; Broom, All Power Propelled; Bulldozers; Concrete Mixer (Two Bag and Over); Conveyor, Portable; Forklift Trucks; Highlift Shovels
or Front Endloaders under 2-1/4 yd.; Hoists, Automatic; Hoists, lnside Elevators; Hoists, Sewer Dragging Machine; Hoists, Tugger Single Drum;
Laser Screed; Rock Drill (Self-Propelled); Rock Drill (Truck Mounted); Rollers, All; Steam Generators; Tractors, All; Tractor Drawn Vibratory Roller;
Winch Trucks with "A" Frame.
Class 3. Air Compressor; Combination small Equipment Operatof Generators; Heaters, Mechanical; Hoists, lnside Elevators (remodeling or
renovation work); Hydraulic Power Units (Pile Driving, Extracting, and Drilling); Pumps, over 3" (1 to 3 not to exceed a total of 300 ft.); Low Boys;
Pumps, Well Points; Welding Machines (2 through 5); Winches,4 Small Electric Drill Winches.
Class 4. Bobcats and/or other Skid Steer Loaders; Oilers; and Brick Forklift.
Class 5. Assistant Craft Foreman.
Class 6. Gradall.
class 7. Mechanics; Welders.
OPERATING ENGINEERS - HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION
Class 1. Asphalt PlanU Asphalt Heater and Planer Combination; Asphalt Heater Scarfire; Asphalt Spreader; Autograder/GOMACO or other similar
type machines: ABG Paver; Backhoes with Caisson Attachment; Ballast Regulator; Belt Loader; Caisson Rigs; Car Dumper; Central Redi-Mix plant;
Combination Backhoe Front Endloader Machine, (1 cu. yd. Backhoe Bucket or over or with attachments); Concrete Breaker (Truck Mounted);
Concrete Conveyor; Concrete Paver over 27E cu. ft.; Concrete Placer; Concrete Tube Float; Cranes, all attachments; Cranes, Tower Cranes of all
types: Creter Crane: Spider Crane; Crusher, Stone, etc.; Derricks, All; Derrick Boats; Derricks, Traveling; Dredges; Elevators, Outside type Rack &
Pinion and Similar Machines; Formless Curb and Gutter Machine; Grader, Elevating; Grader, Motor Grader, Motor Patrol, Auto Patrol, Form
Grader, Pull Grader, Subgrader; Guard Rail Post Driver Truck Mounted; Hoists, One, Two and Three Drum; Heavy Duty Self-Propelled Transporter
or Prime Mover; Hydraulic Backhoes; Backhoes with shear attachments up to 40' of boom reach; Lubrication Technician; Manipulators; Mucking
Machine; Pile DriveB and Skid Rig; Pre-Stress Machine; Pump Cretes Dual Ram; Rock Drill - Crawler or Skid Rig; Rock Drill - Truck Mounted;
Rock/Track Tamper; Roto Mill Grinder; Slip-Form Paver; Snow Melters; SoilTest Drill Rig (Truck Mounted); Straddte Buggies; Hydraulic
Telescoping Form (Tunnel); operation of Tieback Machine; Tractor Drawn Belt Loader; Tractor Drawn Belt loader (with attached pusher - two
engineers); Tractor with Boom; Tractaire with Attachments; Traffic Barrier Transfer Machine; Trenching; Truck Mounted Concrete pump with
Boom; Raised or Blind Hole Drills (Tunnel 5haft); Underground Boring and/or Mining Machines 5 ft. in diameter and over tunnel, etc;
Underground Boring and/or Mining Machines under 5 ft. in diameter; Wheel Excavator; Widener (APSCO).
Class 2. Batch PlanU Bituminous Mixer; Boiler and Throttle Valve; Bulldozers; Car Loader Trailing Conveyors; Combination Backhoe Front
Endloader Machine (Less than 1 cu. yd. Backhoe Bucket or over or with attachments); Compressor and Throttle Valve; Compressor, Common
Receiver (3); Concrete Breaker or Hydro Hammer; Concrete Grinding Machine; Concrete Mixer or Paver 75 Series to and including 27 cu. ft.;
Concrete Spreader; Concrete Curing Machine, Burlap Machine, Belting Machine and Sealing Machine; Concrete Wheelsaw; Conveyor Muck Cars
(Haglund or Similar Type); Drills, All; FinishinB Machine - Concrete; Highlift Shovels or Front Endloader; Hoist - Sewer Dragging Machine;
Hydraulic Boom Trucks (All Attachments); Hydro-Blaster; Hydro Excavating (excluding hose work); Laser Screed; All Locomotives, Dinky; Off-Road
Hauling Units (including articulating) Non Self-LoadinB Ejection Dump; Pump Cretes: Squeeze Cretes - Screw Type Pumps, Gypsum Bulker and
Pump; Roller, AsphalU Rotary Snow Plows; Rototiller, Seaman, etc., self-propelled; Self-Propelled Compactoc Spreader - Chip - Stone, etc.;
Scraper - Single/Twin Engine/Push and Pull; Scraper - Prime Mover in Tandem (Regardless of Size); Tractors pulling attachments, Sheeps Foot,
Disc, Compactor, etc.; Tug Boats.
Class 3. Boilers; Brooms, All Power Propelled; Cement Supply Tender; Compressor, Common Receiver (2); Concrete Mixer (Two Bag and Over);
Conveyor, Portable; Farm-Type Tractors Used for Mowing, Seeding, etc.; Forklift Trucks; Grouting Machine; Hoists, Automatic; Hoists, All
Elevators; Hoists, Tugger Single Drum; Jeep Diggers; Low Boys; Pipe JackinB Machines; Post-Hole Digger; Power Saw, Concrete Power Driven; Pug
Mills; Rollers, other than AsphalU Seed and Straw Blower; Steam 6enerators; Stump Machine; Winch Truck with "A" Framei Work Boats;
Tamper-Form-Motor Driven.
Class 4. Air Compressor; Combination - Small Equipment Operator; Directional Boring Machine; Generators; Heaters, Mechanical; Hydraulic
Power Unit (Pile Driving, Extracting, or Drilling); Light Plants, All (1 through 5); Pumps, over 3" (1 to 3 not to exceed a total of 300 ft.); Pumps,
well Points; Vacuum Trucks (excluding hose work); Welding Machines (2 through 5); Winches,4 Small Electric DrillWinches.
class 5. skidsteer Loader (all); Brick Forklifts; Oilers.
Class 6. Field Mechanics and Field Welders
Class 7. Dowell Machine with Air Compressor; Gradalland machines of like nature.
OPERATING ENGINEER - FLOATING
Diver. Diver Wet Tender, Diver Tender, ROV Pilot, RoV Tender
TRUCK DRIVER - BUIIDIN6, HEAVY AND HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION
Class 1. Two or three Axle Trucks. A-frame Truck when used for transportation purposes; Air Compressors and Welding Machines, including
those pulled by cars, pick-up trucks and tractors; Ambulances; Batch Gate Lockers; Batch Hopperman; Car and Truck Washers; Carry-alls; Fork
Lifts and Hoisters; Helpers; Mechanics Helpers and Greasers; Oil Distributors 2-man operation; Pavement Breakers; Pole Trailer, up to 40 feet;
Power Mower Tractors; Self-propelled Chip Spreader; Skipman; Slurry Trucks, 2-man operation; Slurry Truck Conveyor Operation, 2 or 3 man;
Teamsters; Unskilled Dumpman; and Truck Drivers hauling warning lights, barricades, and portable toilets on the job site.
Class 2. Four axle trucks; Dump Crets and Adgetors under 7 yards; Dumpsters, Track Trucks, Euclids, Hug Bottom Dump Turnapulls or
Turnatrailers when pulling otherthan self-loading equipment or similar equipment under 16cubicyards; Mixer Trucks underTyeards; Ready-
mix Plant Hopper Operator, and Winch Truck, 2 Axles.
Class 3. Five axle trucks; Dump Crets and Adgetors 7 yards and over; Dumpsters, Track Truck, Euclids, Hug Bottom Dump Turnatrailers or
turnapulls when pulling other than self-loading equipment or similar equipment over 15 cubic yards; Explosives and/or Fission MaterialTrucks;
Mixer Trucks 7 yards or over; Mobile Cranes while in transit; Oil Distributors, 1-man operation; Pole Trailer, over 40 feet; Pole and Expandable
Trailers hauling material over 50 feet long; 5lurry trucks, 1-man operation; Winch trucks, 3 axles or more; Mechanic-Truck Welder and Truck
Painter.
Class 4. Six axle trucks; Dual-purpose vehicles, such as mounted crane trucks with hoist and accessories; Foreman; Master Mechanic; Self-
loading equipment like P.B. and trucks with scoops on the front.
TERRAZZO FINISHER
The handling of sand, cement, marble chips, and all other materials that may be used by the Mosaic Terrazzo Mechanic, and the mixing,
grinding, grouting, cleaning and sealing of all Marble, Mosaic, and Terrazzo work, floors, base, stairs, and wainscoting by hand or machine, and in
addition, assisting and aiding Marble, Masonic, and Terrazzo Mechanics.
Other Classifications of Work:
For definitions of classifications not otherwise set out, the Department generally has on file such definitions which are available. lf a task to be
performed is not subject to one ofthe classifications of pay set out, the Department will upon being contacted state which neighboring county
has such a classification and provide such rate, such rate being deemed to exist by reference in this document. lf no neighboring county rate
a pplies to the task, the Depa rtment sha ll undertake a special determination, such special determination beingthen deemed to have existed
under this determination. lf a project requires these, or any classification not listed, please contact lDOl- at 217-782-!TtOtor wage rates or
clarifications.
LANDSCAPING
Landscaping work falls under the existing classifications for laborer, operating engineer and truck driver. The work performed by landscape
plantsman and landscape laborer is covered bythe existing classification of laborer. Thework performed by landscape operators (regardless of
equipment used or its size) is covered bythe classifications ofoperating engineer. The work performed by landscape truck drivers (regardless of
size of truck driven) is covered bythe classifications oftruck driver.
MATERIAL TESTER&MATERIAL TESTER/1NSPECTORI AND:|
Notwithstanding the difference in the classification title,the ciassiflcation entitled"Material Testeri"involves the samejob duties as the
ciassification entit:ed"Material Tester/1nspector l∥ Likewise,the classification entitled“Material Tester∥“invo:ves the same job duties as the
clasJica●on enttled"Mate∥al Tester/lnspector lド
Bond#9277015
PERFORⅣIANCE BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PMSENTS:
finsert contractor name and address here:]
Unit D, Alsip, lL 60803
[insert surety name and address here:]
5th Floor, Schaumburg, lL 60196
APPENDIX 2
Construction Solulons of:L,!nc 12540S ttay plve
as Principal (hereinafter called the "Contractor") and
Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland 1299 Zurich Way
,, organized and existing under the laws of the State of
Y:ry1?f (hereinafter called the "Surety") are held and firmly bound unto Village of Oak
Brook, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois, as the obligee_(hereinafter called the "Owner"), io
the fuit and just sum of [insert full contract price here:] $ 11'l2i ,,-, . -for ttre
payment of which sum of money well and truly to be made, the Contractor and the Surety bind
themselves and their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally,
firmly by these presents, said amount to include payment of actual costs and damages and for attorneys'
fees, architectural fees, design fees, engineering fees, accounting fees, testing fees, consulting fees,
administrative costs, cour( costs, interest and any other fees and expenses resulting from or incurred by
reason of tho Contractor's failure to promptly and faithfully perform its contract with the Owner, said
contract being more fully described below, and to include attorneys' fees, court costs and administrative
and other expenses necessarily paid or incurred in successfully enforcing performance of the obligation
ofthe Surety under this bond.
WHEREAS,thc Contractor has entercd into a writtcn
hcrc:] OCtOber 5th , 2018, with thc Owner
Fire Stalon 93 Bunk Room Renovalon Prolect
agreement dated [insert contract date
titled finsert contract title here:]
ffidconditionsofwhicharobythisreferenceincorporatedhereinasthough
set forth herein.
(thC
mlly
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT if thc
Contractor shall well, truly, and promptly perform all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions,
and agreements of the Contractor under the contract, including but not limited to the Contractor's
obligalions under the Contrac! ( I ) to provide, perform, and complete at tho Work Site and in the manner
rp..1fi.d in the Contract all necessary Worh labor, services, transportation, equipment, materials,
apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas, electric, water, waste disposal, information, data, and other
*.uns and items necessary for [insert general description of the Work here:]
provide and install all materials needed for the renovation of the existing Fire Station and demolition of flooring
t
n"""rrury in connection therewith [except as otherwise expressly provided in the Attachment
-
of
rhe Coniract/;(3) to procure and furnish all bonds, certificates, and policies ofinsurance specified in
the Contract; ( ) to pay all applicable federal, state, and local taxes; (5) to do all other things required
of the Contractor by the Contrac(; and (6) to provide, perform, and complete all of the foregoing in a
proper and workmanlike manner and in full compliance with, and as required by and pursuant to, the
bontracU all of which is herein referred to as the "Work," whether or not any of the Work enter into and
become component parts of the improvement contemplated, then this obligation shall be null and void;
otherwise it shall remain in fuIl force and effect.
APPENDIX 2
The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no changes, modifications, alterations,
omissions, deletions, additions, cxtensions of timc, or forbearances on the part of the Owner or the
Contractor to the other in or to the terms of said Contract in or to the schedules, plans, drawings, or
specifications; in or to the method or manner of performance of the Work; in or to Owner-furnished
facilities, equipment, material, service, or site; or in or to the mode or rnanncr of payment therefore shall
in any way release the Contractor and the Surety or either or any of them, or any of their heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, or assigns, or affect the obligations of the Surety on this bond, all notice of
any and all of the foregoing changes, modifications, alterations, omissions, deletion$ additions,
extensions of time, or forbearances and notice of any and all defaults by the Contractor or of the Owner's
termination of the Contractor being hereby waived by the Surety.
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in thc foregoing paragraph, in no event shall the
obligations of the Surety under this bond in the event of the Contractor's default be greater than the
obligations of the Contractor undcr the Contract in tho absence of tho Contractor default.
In the event of a default or defaults by the Contractor, the Owner shall have the right to take
over and complete the Contract on 30 calendar days' writtcn notice to the Surety, in which event the
Surety shall pay the Owner all costs incurred by the Owner in taking over and completing the Contract.
At its option, the Owner may instead request that the Surety take over and complete the Contract,
in which cvcnt thc Surety shall take reasonable steps to proceed promptly with completion no later than
30 calendar days after the date on which the Owner notif,tes the Surety that the Owner wants the Surety
to take over and complete the Contract.
The Orvner shall have no obligation to actually incur any expense or correct any deficient
performance of the Contractor to be entitled to receive the proceeds of this bond.
No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other
than the Owner or the heirs, executors, administrators, or successors of the Owner.
Signed and sealed this day of October
Attest/Witge, ps:/By:
Title:
SURETY Fidelly
PRINCIPA
"ireS」
an.21,2020
SCHIPMA
Bond#9277015
LABOR AND ⅣIATERIALS PAYpllENT BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
APPENDIX 3
[inSC■COntractor namc and address herα]∪nt D,Alsip,IL 60803
Construction Solutions of lL., lnc. 12540 S. Holiday Drive
,l Prin9iPal(hCrCittiCr 9」ゃ生!hC」`C甲 11,CtOr")and
[insert suregr name and address here:]
5th Floor, Schaumburg, lL 60196
Fideiity and Deposit Company of Maryiand 1299 Zurich Way
organized and existing under the laws of the State of
Maryland (hereinafter called the "Surety") are held and firmly bound unto Village of Oak
Brook, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois, as the obligee (hereinafter called the "Owner"), for
the use and benefit of itself and of claimants as hereinafter defined (the "Claimants") in the full and just
sum of [insert full contract price here:] $71'721 to bc paid to the Owner or the
Claimants or the Owner's or the Claimant's assigns, to which payment well and truly to be made the
Contractor and the Surety bind themselves and their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and
assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents, said amount to include attorney's fees, court
costs, and administrative and other expenses necessarily paid or incurred in successfully enforcing
performance of the obligation of the Surety under this bond.
WHEREAS, the Contractor has entered into a written agreement dated [insert contract
here:] October 5th"" . , 201-8. , with the Owner titled finsert contract title here:]
Fire Station 93 Bunk Room Renovation Project
gn
set forth herein.
datc
(thC
hlly
NoW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT if the
Contractor shall promptly pay or cause to be paid all sums of money that may be due to any Claimant
with respect to the Contractor's obligations under the Contract: (1) to provide, perform, and complete
at the Work Site and in the manner specified in the Contract all necessary Work, labor, services,
transportation, equipment, materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas, electric, water, waste
disposal, information, data and other means and items necessary for [insert general description of the
Work here:l provideandinstall all materialsneededfortherenovationof theexistingFireStationanddemolitionofflooring
(2) to procure and fumish all permits,
iicenses, and other governmental approvals and authorizations necessary in connection therewith
[except as otherwise expressly provided in Attochment A to the Contrsct/; (3) to procure and furnish
all Bonds and all certificates and policies of insurance specified in the Contract; (4) to pay all applicable
federal, state, and local taxes; (5) to do all other things required ofthe Contractor by the Contract; and
(6) to provide, perform, and complete all of the foregoing in a proper and workmanlike manner and in
full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, the Contract; all of which is herein referred to
as the "Work," whether or not any of said Work enter into and become component parts of the
improvement contemplated, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full
force and effect.
For purpose of this bond, a Claimant is defined as one having a direct contract with the
Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to provide, perform, or complete any part of the
Work.
The Contractor and the Surety hereby jointly and severally agree that every Claimant that has
nor had all just claims for the fumishing of any part of the Work paid in full, including without limitation
all claims for amounts due for materials, Iubricants, oil, gasoline, rentals of or service or repairs on
machinery, equipment, and tools consumed or used in connection with the furnishing of any part of the
APPENDIX 3
Work, may sue on this bond for the use of that Claimant, may prosecute the suit to final judgment for
such sum or sums as may be justly due that Claimant, and may have execution therein; provided,
however, that the Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any such suit.
The provisions of 30 ELCS 550/1 and 2 ofthe Illinois Compiled Statutes shall be deemed inserted herein,
including the time limits within which notices of claim must be filed and actions brought under this
bond.
The Contractor and the Surety hereby jointly agree that the Owner may sue on this bond if the
Owner is held liable to, or voluntarily agrees tG pay, any Claimant directly, but nothing in this bond shall
create any duty on the part of the Owner to pay any Claimant,
The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no changes, rrodifications,
alterations, omissions, deletions, additions, extensions of time, or forbearances on the part of the Owner
or the Contractor to the other in or to the terms of the Contract; in or to the schedules, plans, drawings,
or specifications; in or to the method or manner of performance, of the Work; in or to Owner-furnished
facilities, equipment, material, service, or site; or in or to the mode or manner of payment therefor shall
in any way release the Contractor and the Surety or either or any of them, or any of their heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, or assigns, or affect the obligations of the Surety on this bond, all notice of
any and all of the foregoing changes, modifications, alterations, omissions, deletions, additions,
extensions of time, or forbearances and notice of any and all defaults by the Contractor or ofthe Owner's
termination of thc Contractor being hereby waived by the Surety.
Signed and sealed ttris 5!h day of October
CONTRA
SURETY
#34920193 v2
201
By:
Attest/W*itness: ,
By:
Title:
STATE OF ILLINOIS
COLINTY OF COOK
I, Kristen Schmidt a Notary Public in and for the state and county aforesaid, do hereby certifu that David J. Roth of
Orland Park. Illinois who is personally known to me, appeared before me this day and acknowledged that he signed,
sealed and delivered the foregoing instrument as his free voluntary act as Attorney-in-Fact of Fideli8 and Deposit
Company of Maryland the free and voluntary act of the Fidelitv and Deposit Companv of Marvland for the uses and
purposes therein set forth.
Given under my hand and Notarial Seal this 5th day of October, A.D. 201 8
My commission cxpircs Dcccrnbcr 29, l02l
N.O'I"ARIAI, JUIU\]'Notary Publici
ZURICH AⅣIERICAN INSURANCE CODIIPANY
COLONIAL A■lEERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY
FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COpIIPANY OF PIARYLAND
POWER OF ATTORNEY
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PttSENTS:Thatthc ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY,a corporation ofthc Statc ofNcw
York,thc COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY,a corporation ofthc State of Ma,land,and thc FIDELITY
AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND a corporation ofthc Statc of Maヮ land(hcrCin c011cctivcly called thc"Companicゞ :),by
DIIICHAEL BOND,Vice President,in pursuancc of authority grantcd by Articlc V,Scction 8,ofthc By―Laws of said Companics,which
arc sct forth on thc rcvcrsc sidc hercof and are hcrcby ccrtiflcd to bc in in forcc and effcct on thc datc hcreol do hcrCby nominatc,
constitutc,and appoint John Jo NASO,JR.,April C.ARNOLD,David Jo ROTH and Kristen SCHDIIIDT,a1l of Oriand Park,Illinois,
EACH itstruc and la、 vil agcnt and Attomcy‐in‐Fact,to makc,cxccutC,Seal and dclivcr,for,and on its bchalf as surcty,and as its act and
dccd:any and a∥ bonds and undertakings,and thc cxccution of such bonds or undcrtakings in pursuancc of thcse prcscnts,shall bc as
binding upon said Companics,as illy and amply,to all intcnts and purposcs,as ifthey had bccn duly cxccutcd and ack■o、vlcdgcd by thc
regularly clccted offlcers ofthc ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY at its offlce in Ncw York,Ncw York.,thc rcgularly
clcctcd ofrlccrs ofthc COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY atits ottlccin Owings Milis,Maryland.,and thc
regularly elcctcd omccrs Ofthc FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND atits offlccin Owings Mills,Ma,land.,in thcir
own proper pcrsons
The said Vice Prcsidcnt docs hcrcby certi″that thC C苅 ract sct forth on thc reverse sidc hcrcofis a truc copy of Articlc V,Scction 8,of
thc By‐Laws ofsaid Companies,and is now in forcc.
IN Wll■ヾESS WHER130F,thc sald Vicc‐President has hcrcunto subscribcd his/her nalnes and aFlxcd thc Corporate Scals of thc said
ZURICH APIIERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY,COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COPIPANY,and
FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT CO■lIPANY OF MARYLAND,this 20th day ofMarch,A.D.2018.
ATTEST:
ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY
COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY
FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF ⅣIARYLAND
″
Vice President
Michael Bond
State of Maryland
County of Baltimore
On this 20th day of March, A.D. 2018, before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, duly commissioned and qualified, MICHAEL
BOND, Vice President, and DAWN E. BROWN, Assistant Secretary, of the Companies, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers
described in and who executed the preceding instrument, and acknowledged the execution of same, and being by me duly swom, deposeth and saith, that
he/she is the said officer ofthe Company aforesaid, and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Corporate Seals ofsaid Companies, and that
the said Corporate Seals and the signature as such officer were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction ofthe said
Corporations.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal the day and year first above written.
.sIiililiil,..jt)i"'*'
"''
t'
(),-,t^,.r- cf' l' )"- ^.' ""*"-fi
'',;ll;liJi.r''
Constance A. Dunn, Notary Public
My Commission Expires: July 9,2019
「秒レ越盛ヽ
町
Assistant Secretary
Dawn E. Brown
POA―F036-3915A
EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF THE COMPANIES
"Article V, Section 8, Attomeys-in-Fact. The Chief Executive Officer, the President, or any Executive Vice President or Vice President
may, by written instrument under the attested corporate seal, appoint attomeys-in-fact with authority to execute bonds, policies,
recognizances, stipulations, undertakings, or other like instruments on behalf of the Company, and may authorize any officer or any such
attomey-in-fact to affix the corporate seal thereto; and may with or without cause modify of revoke any such appointment or authority at any
time."
CERTIFICATE
I, the undersigned, Vice President of the ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY, the COLONIAL AMERICAN
CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, do hereby certiff that the
foregoing Power of Attorney is still in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certiff that Article V, Section 8, of
the By-Laws of the Companies is still in force.
This Power of Attorney and Certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution of the Board of
Directors of the ZURICH AMEzuCAN INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the l5th day of December 1998.
RESOLVED: "That the signature of the President or a Vice President and the attesting signature of a Secretary or an Assistant Secretary
and the Seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile on any Power of Attomey...Any such Power or any certificate thereof bearing such
facsimile signature and seal shall be valid and binding on the Company."
This Powerof Attomey and Certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution of the Board of
Directors of the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 5th day of
May, 1994, and the fotlowing resolution of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a
meeting duly called and held on the lOth day of May, 1990.
RESOLVED: "That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced seal of the company and facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature
ofany Vice-President, Secretary, or Assistant Secretary ofthe Company, whether made heretofore or hereafter, wherever appearing upon a
certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect
as though manually affixed.
,r.ri, IgJll'#o.U,ffiffi"{' :
t';%TK:'subscribed mv name and arfixed the corporate seals orthe said companies'
歩ルズ,ゥ
David McVicker,Vicc President
BOND,PLEASE SUBMIT ALL REQUIRED
払
TO REPORT A CLAIM WITH
INFORMAT10N TO:
Zurich American lnsurance Co.
Attn:Surew Claims
1299 Zurich Way
Schaumburg,IL 60196-1056
REGARD TO A SURETY
3ι NK″00mPFNOM■7rON5
0'
Fire SI●lion 93
725 Enlerprise D『ive′Ook Brooに :L
60523
for,he
VILLAG1 0F OAK BR00K
1200(Dak Brook Roud′Ook Brooし ]L60523
GENERAL NOTES
ギ_嘲 :i喜瀑ゝ=rユ 象.i二
｀
l・ 。だ・:L・・・・m
・m・
:l'半 1・ 理助≠
まだri二 ■111二 重
i_l"
…`"ま 孵
, ・綺ま "・ 1卦 aヽ ～・事ニ
INDEX OF DRAWONeS CODE DATA
……
SYMBOL LEST
…―躍
匝)/ P燎
# frM.il
@_- .**
/}r-xt
---{lgt;
t{A\1-l
*.-^o-- **
tur.......oU- ffira
ABBREV口 AT10NS
MATER口 AL SYMBOLS
r///a kは,r////1 αx輸 〔り燎嗜u椰
■・ F c…■
>く ―Dに “
― 腱
…
1ヽ ヽN ,由 …
BIJNK R00m
R[∥OVArrONS
GENERAL PLAN NOTES
WALL TYPE SCHEOuLE
aP^RrlluPuffiY*n!mrc 0o.aw)
fiflf owmmmngEs
FUBre:*FL 3'wO'dO',ffiHIoBMlNN:
SVMBOL uSThh
コ障冊踏…3…―・G…M■■謀紺n02X…¨mTEM Ю¨
x
Z
Effilft.ffiNM
-.L--]-
vhd&t.d
i0&Ltdld
o52t
襴艶ど
…
①場 興 卿 堕 G鼎 興 興L
CASEWORK NOTES
NOTES:
TO BE PROVIDED BY OWNER ANVINCiDENTAL
BLOCK:NC&TRIM SHALL BE PROV:DED BV TH:S
CASEWORK SCHEDULE 器島、書IR為 ∬'=mS'H址
SiZE(INCHES)
□HGT. IWIDTH
vl&c. do* ad
rmek!dH
&a
w
…
―mlB
O鰹 離腎鴨語鑑関理露健 '酬 肝`H°iC PVI“!…N`粗 I・ 旺囃ヽ0■蜀=脚 船錯出麗欄認tS°翻知I“ 2祢 翻yぉ 智円銀tBC utDI●麟mυ ￢■oば 、
'留 濃認さ営窯
歳∝U・ 剛鰤S"遷 ¨ 駆Cer
` 署肥
=罰
[雛 露習じ湖晃薔ざ盤♂努讐纏W°・
°震殿 %溜 暉閣ヽI傭 1ソ %簿 翻駄い 風R翻 ―l離翻織轟師殷諄躙辮緩蟹鵬綿お1概 踪=堕
警冊躍甲鴇爬圏躍鶏癬 銀
`:「
調器躊
.騨 X COMPUTER JACK電
3U∥κ R00“l(Ю
R尋 ■9響 課鴇は 、島 馴評襦【~A υ5°°報6に 嘲ヽ
12.,
踊網鍵 器 編譜鶴儡鴨躍
郎・°・・I●●Yへ tu鋼
“
n―t‐7KWS F…爛砿
“
◎"l・
‐CO"旺 [Rtt H●Rpmt■DALL WORK SHOWN ON T時 :S SHEET
:S PART OF BASE B:0
DATA OuTLET DETAIL`ヽ